2019 NAVIGATOR Owner’s Manual
September 2018
First Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
KL7J 19A321 AA
Owner’s Manual
2019 NAVIGATOR
3060922_19a_Navigator_OM_080618.indd 1 8/16/18 2:49 PM
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications,
design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language
in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201808 20180807173941
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your
hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ...........................................7
Symbols Glossary .............................................7
Data Recording ...............................................10
Perchlorate .......................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
..........................................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation
..........................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment .........14
Export Unique Options ..................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment .........................15
At a Glance
Instrument Panel Overview ..........................16
Child Safety
General Information .......................................18
Installing Child Restraints ............................20
Booster Seats .................................................33
Child Restraint Positioning ..........................36
Child Safety Locks .........................................38
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................39
Fastening the Seatbelts ...............................40
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .......................45
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ...........................................................45
Seatbelt Reminder .........................................46
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance
.........................................................................48
Seatbelt Extension ........................................48
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .............................50
Supplementary Restraints System
Principle of Operation ...................................51
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................52
Front Passenger Sensing System .............54
Side Airbags ...................................................56
Safety Canopy™ ..............................................57
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........59
Airbag Disposal ..............................................60
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio Frequencies
..........................................................................61
Remote Control ..............................................62
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
........................................................................66
MyKey™
Principle of Operation ..................................67
Creating a MyKey ..........................................68
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................69
Checking MyKey System Status ................69
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
.........................................................................70
MyKey — Troubleshooting ..........................70
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking .................................72
Keyless Entry ...................................................76
1
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Liftgate
Power Liftgate .................................................79
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ...........................83
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior
Sensor ..........................................................85
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Anti-Theft
Alarm System .............................................86
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards .....................87
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ....................89
Audio Control .................................................90
Voice Control ..................................................90
Cruise Control ................................................90
Information Display Control .........................91
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................92
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals .....................................93
Wipers and Washers
Autowipers ......................................................94
Windshield Washers .....................................95
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ............95
Lighting
General Information ......................................97
Lighting Control ..............................................97
Autolamps .......................................................98
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .......................99
Headlamp Exit Delay ....................................99
Daytime Running Lamps ..............................99
Automatic High Beam Control .................100
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................101
Headlamp Leveling ......................................101
Adaptive Headlamps ...................................101
Direction Indicators .....................................102
Welcome Lighting ........................................102
Interior Lamps ...............................................103
Ambient Lighting ..........................................104
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows ............................................105
Global Opening and Closing ....................106
Exterior Mirrors .............................................106
Interior Mirror ................................................108
Childminder Mirror .......................................109
Toll Reader .....................................................109
Sun Visors .......................................................110
Moonroof .........................................................110
Liftgate Window ..............................................111
Instrument Cluster
Gauges .............................................................113
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..................114
Audible Warnings and Indicators ..............119
Information Displays
General Information ....................................120
Information Messages ................................125
Head Up Display ..........................................148
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control ........................152
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.......................................................................154
2
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Rear Passenger Climate Controls ............155
Heated Windshield ......................................156
Heated Rear Window ..................................156
Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................156
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................156
Remote Start ..................................................157
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ...................158
Head Restraints ............................................159
Power Seats ...................................................163
Memory Function .........................................167
Rear Seats .......................................................171
Heated Seats .................................................177
Climate Controlled Seats ...........................179
Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ................181
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ................................185
Wireless Accessory Charging ...................186
Storage Compartments
Center Console ............................................189
Overhead Console ......................................189
Starting and Stopping the Engine
General Information ......................................191
Keyless Starting .............................................191
Starting a Gasoline Engine ........................192
Engine Block Heater ...................................194
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop .............................................196
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .......................................199
Fuel Quality ..................................................200
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................200
Running Out of Fuel ....................................201
Refueling .......................................................202
Fuel Consumption ......................................205
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ...............................................206
Catalytic Converter .....................................207
Transmission
Automatic Transmission .............................210
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive .............................216
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential .............................224
Brakes
General Information ...................................225
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
......................................................................226
Electric Parking Brake ................................226
Hill Start Assist .............................................228
Auto Hold ......................................................229
Traction Control
Principle of Operation .................................231
3
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Using Traction Control ................................231
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ................................232
Using Stability Control ...............................233
Hill Descent Control
Principle of Operation ................................235
Using Hill Descent Control .......................235
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ................................236
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................237
Front Parking Aid ........................................238
Side Sensing System .................................239
Active Park Assist .......................................240
Rear View Camera ......................................249
360 Degree Camera ..................................252
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation ................................255
Using Cruise Control ..................................255
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ................256
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................264
Lane Keeping System ................................265
Blind Spot Information System .................271
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................275
Steering .........................................................279
Pre-Collision Assist .....................................280
Drive Mode Control ....................................284
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage .........................287
Cargo Nets ....................................................289
Roof Racks and Load Carriers .................290
Load Limit ......................................................292
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................297
Trailer Reversing Aids ................................298
Trailer Sway Control ...................................308
Recommended Towing Weights .............309
Essential Towing Checks .............................311
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .......319
Driving Hints
Breaking-In ....................................................323
Reduced Engine Performance .................323
Economical Driving .....................................323
Driving Through Water ..............................324
Floor Mats .....................................................324
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................326
Hazard Flashers ...........................................327
Fuel Shutoff ...................................................327
Jump Starting the Vehicle .........................328
Post-Crash Alert System ...........................330
Transporting the Vehicle ............................331
Towing Points ................................................331
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ...............333
In California (U.S. Only) ..............................334
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .......................335
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only) ..........................................336
4
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................337
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
......................................................................339
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) ......339
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
......................................................................340
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart ............................341
Changing a Fuse .........................................357
Maintenance
General Information ...................................359
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............359
Under Hood Overview ..............................360
Engine Oil Dipstick .....................................362
Engine Oil Check ........................................362
Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................363
Engine Coolant Check ...............................364
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check ......369
Transfer Case Fluid Check .......................369
Brake Fluid Check .......................................370
Washer Fluid Check .....................................371
Fuel Filter ........................................................371
Changing the 12V Battery ..........................371
Checking the Wiper Blades ......................373
Changing the Wiper Blades ......................374
Adjusting the Headlamps ..........................374
Changing a Bulb ..........................................376
Changing the Engine Air Filter .................376
Vehicle Care
General Information ....................................378
Cleaning Products .......................................378
Cleaning the Exterior ..................................379
Waxing ...........................................................380
Cleaning the Engine ....................................381
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
.......................................................................381
Cleaning the Interior ...................................382
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................384
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................384
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ................385
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................385
Vehicle Storage ...........................................386
Body Styling Kits ..........................................387
Wheels and Tires
General Information ....................................388
Tire Care ........................................................390
Using Snow Chains ....................................404
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...........405
Changing a Road Wheel ............................410
Technical Specifications .............................416
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications ..................................418
Motorcraft Parts ............................................419
Vehicle Identification Number .................420
Vehicle Certification Label ........................420
Transmission Code Designation ..............421
Capacities and Specifications ..................422
Bulb Specification Chart ............................429
Audio System
General Information ....................................432
Audio Unit .....................................................434
Satellite Radio ..............................................436
5
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Table of Contents
USB Port ........................................................439
Media Hub ....................................................440
SYNC™ 3
General Information .....................................441
Home Screen ...............................................456
Using Voice Recognition ...........................458
Entertainment ...............................................468
Phone .............................................................482
Navigation .....................................................490
Apps ................................................................501
Settings ..........................................................504
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ........................524
Accessories
Accessories ..................................................542
Lincoln Protect
Lincoln Protect .............................................544
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ..........547
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .............551
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................555
Scheduled Maintenance Record ............558
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .................579
End User License Agreement ..................584
Declaration of Conformity ..........................614
Type Approvals .............................................615
6
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
7
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
8
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E272858
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
9
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada in Canada), and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted
by law, use vehicle diagnostic information
for vehicle improvement or with other
information we may have about you, (for
example, your contact information), to offer
you products or services that may interest
you. Data may be provided to our service
providers such as part suppliers that may
help diagnose malfunctions, and who are
similarly obligated to protect data. We retain
this data only as long as necessary to
perform these functions or to comply with
law. We may provide information where
required in response to official requests to
law enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with lawful
authority or court order, and such information
may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S.
only (if equipped), if you choose to use
connected apps and services, such as SYNC
Vehicle Health Report or Lincoln Way Mobile
App, you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used to
provide services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you products
and services that may interest you, where
permitted by law. For Canada only, for more
information, please review the Ford of
Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca,
including our U.S. data storage and use of
service providers in other jurisdictions who
may be subject to legal requirements in
Canada, the United States and other
countries applicable to them, for example,
lawful requirements to disclose personal
information to governmental authorities in
those countries.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
10
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
11
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
12
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate that these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A
great way to know for sure you are getting
this level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction
with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle
diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming
services. Installing an aftermarket device that
uses the DLC during normal driving for
purposes such as remote insurance company
monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to
other devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
13
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
interference with or even damage to vehicle
systems. We do not recommend or endorse
the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless
approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will
not cover damage caused by an aftermarket
plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor Company's
sustainability progress and initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
15
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
E255782
QRSTU
16
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
At a Glance
Direction indicators. See Direction
Indicators (page 102).
A
Instrument cluster. See Instrument
Cluster (page 113).
B
Wiper lever. See Wipers and
Washers (page 94).
C
Start button. See Keyless Starting
(page 191).
D
Trailer backup assist. See Trailer
Reversing Aids (page 298).
E
Information and entertainment
display. See General Information
(page 441).
F
Hazard warning flasher switch.
See Hazard Flashers (page 327).
G
Automatic transmission. See
Automatic Transmission (page
210).
H
Climate control. See Climate
Control (page 152).
I
Rear defrost. See Rear Passenger
Climate Controls (page 155).
J
Audio. See Audio System (page
432).
K
Voice control. See Voice Control
(page 90).
L
Information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 120).
M
Information display control. See
Information Display Control (page
91).
N
Horn.O
Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 89).
P
Cruise control. See Cruise Control
(page 255).
Q
Pedal adjustment. See Adjusting
the Pedals (page 93).
R
Audio control. See Audio Control
(page 90).
S
Liftgate control. See Power
Liftgate (page 79).
T
Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 97).
U
17
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or animals
to these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
18
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seatback upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
19
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position.
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age
four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
20
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child restraint
and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
• For second-row seating positions, adjust
the recliner slightly to improve child
restraint fit. If needed, remove the head
restraints.
• For third-row seating positions, stow the
head restraints to improve child restraint
fit. See Head Restraints (page 159).
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child restraint with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated
is a forward facing child restraint, the steps
are the same for installing a rear facing child
restraint.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
Standard seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
21
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is
not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until you
pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
22
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that exists once the extra weight of the
child is added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness of
the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle provides extra help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 in
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
23
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is
not twisted.
24
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
25
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that exists once the extra weight of the
child is added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness of
the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle will additionally help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 in
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the vehicle seatback and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.
26
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach
the child restraint. However, you can still use
the seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must also
attach the top tether strap to the proper top
tether anchor if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child restraint. We
recommend the use of a child safety seat
having a top tether strap. See Using Tether
Straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
Second Row Bench Seat
E251314
Second Row Bucket Seats
E251315
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback, below the locator symbols on the
seatback. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions to properly install
a child restraint with LATCH attachments.
E144054
The locator symbols are on round plastic
buttons for the center seat and on
rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
restraint only to the anchors shown.
27
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child restraint from side to side and
forward and back where it is secured to the
vehicle. The seat should move less than one
inch when you do this for a proper
installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap
if the tether strap on your safety seat does
not reach the appropriate top tether anchor
in the vehicle.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle have
built-in tether strap anchors behind the seats
as described below.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view).
Second Row Bench Seat
E251316
Second Row Bucket Seats
E251319
28
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the correct
tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH
attachments, do not tighten the tether strap
enough to lift the child restraint off the
vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated
in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping
the child restraint just touching the vehicle
seat gives the best protection in a severe
crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
29
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Second Row Seating Positions
E251593
30
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Second Row Bucket Seating Positions
E251594
31
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Third Row Seating Positions
E251595
1. For center seating positions, route the
child safety seat tether strap over the
back of the seat. For outboard seating
positions, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If the top of the safety
seat hits the head restraint, recline the
seatback slightly to obtain proper fit.
2. Clip the tether strap to the anchor. If the
tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
3. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If the safety seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
32
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend its
use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat backrest with knees
bent comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
33
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head (as
measured at the tops of the ears) above the
top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position
with a higher seat backrest or head restraint
and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using
a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
34
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
35
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books
or towels to boost your child's height.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
36
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined Weight
of Child and Child
Restraint
Restraint Type
Seatbelt OnlySeatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Top Tether Anchor)
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
LATCH (Lower
Anchors Only)
LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
37
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
158).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E249891
The locks are on the rear edge of each rear
door and must be set separately for each
door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
38
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be
properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may
be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine.
The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their
seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking
mode, (except driver seatbelt and rear
inflatable seatbelt).
39
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to activate
in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and
in rollovers. The seatbelt pretensioners at
the front seating positions are designed to
tighten the seatbelts firmly against the
occupant’ s body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the seatbelts.
In frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners
can be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the seatbelt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you
securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
40
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
E275033
The retractor for the third row center seatbelt
is in the roof.
To fasten the seatbelt:
1. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if
you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on
a slope.
2. Insert the smaller tongue into the smaller
buckle to the left of the center seat.
41
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
3. Pull the larger tongue across the lap and
insert it into the buckle to the right of the
center seat.
Note: If in constant use, you can leave the
belt buckled in the smaller buckle. When it
is not in use, or when you fold or move the
rear seats, you should release the belt from
the smaller buckle. Using the tongue of the
adjacent seatbelt, press the red button on
the smaller buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low across
the hips below the belly and worn as tight
as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt
to cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard passenger
and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle
sensitive locking mode and the automatic
locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the
seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the
height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to
retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull
the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small
42
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear
seat backrest or push the seat backrest
cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically
pre-locks. The belt still retracts to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver
seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use this mode when you install a child safety
seat, except a booster, in the passenger front
or rear seating positions. Properly restrain
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. See
Seatbelts (page 39).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Non-Inflatable Seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt
is now in the automatic locking mode.
Rear Outermost Inflatable Seatbelts (Second
Row Only–If Equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull
upward until you pull the entire belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
43
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outermost seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child safety
car seats and belt positioning booster seats
when you properly install them. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the seatbelt
remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt
webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
• Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
44
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated seatbelt's increased
diameter more effectively holds the occupant
in the appropriate seating position, and
spreads crash forces over more area of the
body than regular seatbelts. This helps
reduce pressure on the chest and helps
control head and neck motion for
passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes, side
impact crashes and rollovers. The fact that
the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in
a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the seatbelt properly could reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt and
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
45
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and the indicator chime sounds
for a few seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime turn off.The driver seatbelt is buckled while the warning lamp is illuminated
and the indicator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime remain off.The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to
the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
WARNING: The system will only
provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This system monitors all seating positions
and provides audio and graphic feedback.
E71880
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do not
fasten your seatbelt when you
switch the ignition on. The lamp and tone
switch off when you fasten your seatbelt or
about one minute has elapsed.
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front outermost passenger. This
lamp illuminates and a warning tone sounds
if you or your front passenger do not fasten
the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle speed
exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). To deactivate the
warning, see Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature.
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do not
place large objects on the seat.
E206718
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
the number of seating positions
with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
when a seating position changes from
unfastened to fastened.
46
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
E274569
This warning displays and a tone sounds if
an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
buckle or it becomes unfastened.
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
Seatbelt Status
E274570
E274703
Seatbelt fastened.A
Seatbelt not fastened.B
Seatbelt recently unfastened.C
FaultD
To view the seatbelt status, use the
information display controls on the steering
wheel.
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature - Front outermost seats only
WARNING: While the system allows
you to deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this terminates the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the
procedure.
47
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Make sure that:
• You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unbuckle the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp turns
off (about one minute). After Step 2, wait
an additional five seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
seatbelt warning lamp turns on.
4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt. After
Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp flashes
for confirmation.
• This switches the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This switches the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child safety
seat systems periodically to make sure they
work properly and are not damaged. Inspect
the vehicle and child restraint seatbelts to
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle seatbelt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front seatbelt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat backrest (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies
in use in vehicles involved in a crash be
replaced. However, if the crash was minor
and an authorized dealer finds that the belts
do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use
during a crash should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 378).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
48
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by Lincoln Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the fit of the belt across the
torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Lincoln Motor Company dealers. Only Lincoln
seatbelt extensions made by the same
company which made the original equipment
seatbelts, should be used with Lincoln
seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your
extension is compatible with your Lincoln
vehicle restraint system.
49
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Passenger seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning lamp and tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front
seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicators.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
50
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and right
front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
51
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and passenger front airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
52
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 59).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat
back, and center themselves on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
53
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator which
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled). The indicator lamp
is in the center stack of the instrument panel.
Note: When you first switch the ignition on,
the passenger airbag status indicator off and
on lamps illuminate for a short period to
confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator illuminates the off
lamp and stays lit to remind you that the
front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp, then switch your
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from your vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
54
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly seated occupant and determine if
the front passenger frontal airbag should be
enabled.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator illuminates the on
lamp and remains illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator off lamp is lit, it is possible
that the person is not sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens:
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to detect
that person and enable the passenger
frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains lit even
after this, you should advise the person
to ride in the rear seat.
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator off lamp illuminates, the passenger
side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled
to avoid the risk of airbag deployment
issues.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest map
pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter
due to the conditions described in the
previous list.
55
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 59).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat or cargo interfering with
the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering
with the seat, please take the following steps
to remove the obstruction:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Switch your vehicle off.
• Driver or adult passengers should check
for any objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that
the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
this may or may not be a problem due to
the front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact your Customer
Relationship Center.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the front or rear
seatbacks, or in areas that may come into
contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
56
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the seat backrests of the front seats. The
airbag was designed to inflate between the
door panel and occupant to further enhance
the protection provided occupants in side
impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found on
your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the seat backrest of
the driver and front passenger seats.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 59).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
57
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during significant
side crashes or when a certain likelihood of
a rollover event is detected by the rollover
sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to
the roof side rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. In certain
sideways crashes or rollover events, the
Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless
of which seats are occupied. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact
crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 59).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
58
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your vehicle
(including hood, bumper system, frame,
front end body structure, tow hooks and
hood pins) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify or add equipment to
the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the front seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, rear inflatable belts, seat mounted
side airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based
on the type of crash, the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. See Instrument Cluster
(page 113). Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or stays
lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
59
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the seatbelt pretensioners
and rear inflatable belts is to activate in
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and
in rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
60
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery
chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be able
to use your remote control. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure you lock your vehicle
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are within range of your vehicle,
the remote control will operate if you
unintentionally press any button.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and
authorizes your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You touch the unlock sensor on the back
of the door handle with the intelligent
access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your
vehicle.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press the unlock button on the
transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 62).
61
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E254198
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E254199
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the key
blade, then pull the blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Using the Key Blade
The key cylinder is under the handle.
To access the cylinder:
62
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E251885
1. Pull the handle and hold it.
2. While holding the handle outward,
identify the cylinder and insert the key
blade into the slot.
3. Actuate the cylinder to unlock or lock the
door.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the battery is low. See General
Information (page 120).
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.
E254199
1. Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
63
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E218690
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218691
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
The horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the direction indicators do
not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
64
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Start
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes,
do not use remote start if your vehicle is
parked indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has
an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 152).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The system does not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature in the
information display. See General
Information (page 120).
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: Press the push button ignition switch
on the instrument panel once to exit remote
start.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the vehicle
runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on
the setting.
65
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 15 minutes, the duration
extends by another 15 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 30
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
Memory Feature
You can use the intelligent access key to
recall memory positional settings for the
driver seat, power mirrors, power steering
column and power adjustable foot pedals;
and to recall your personal profile. Unlock
your vehicle with the intelligent access key
to recall the memory positions. You can
program the intelligent access key to recall
memory positions. See Memory Function
(page 167).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 83).
66
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features listed
below. If your vehicle has this equipment,
then you cannot change the following
settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey
mutes the audio system until drivers, and
in some instances, passengers, fasten
their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle
includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic
audio system, then the radio may not
mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems or
parking aids turn on automatically when
you use the MyKey system. For example,
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure warning
or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey
drivers may be able to turn the lane
departure warning feature off, but this
feature turns back on automatically with
every new key cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in some
markets. For example, MyKey may
prevent manual navigation destination
input while the vehicle is in any gear
other than park (P) or when the vehicle
reaches a certain rate of speed.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if this feature is available in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward with
an admin key.
67
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing choices
to switch them on or off, or to select a more
specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and a
tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display when
MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the
limited volume. MyKey also disables the
automatic volume control. Note: If your
vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a
very basic audio system, then the radio
may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and active
for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or
emergency assistance and the do not
disturb features stay on even if a MyKey
driver uses the feature's control to switch
it off. When you select, you will not be
able to turn off Advance Trac or traction
control (if your vehicle has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 192). If your vehicle is
equipped with a push-button start, place
the remote control into the backup slot.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
83).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. From the MyKey menu select the
option Create MyKey. See Information
Displays (page 120).
4. When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
68
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
MyKey™
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming and
Changing Configurable Settings.
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. See Information Displays (page
120).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status at once. To clear
all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the
information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to begin clearing your MyKey
programming. See Information Displays
(page 120).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You cannot
remove the MyKey restrictions individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 120).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys
have been deleted.
69
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
MyKey™
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to determine how many admin keys you have
for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY — TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into
the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 83).
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key.
There always has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
70
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
MyKey™
Potential causesCondition
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a
MyKey (page 68).
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 68).
· Purchase a new key or transmitter from your authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see your
authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 83).
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
71
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim illuminates
when you lock the door. It remains on for
up to 10 minutes after you switch the ignition
off.
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch and interior trunk
release switch do not operate after 20
seconds. You must unlock your vehicle with
the remote control or keyless keypad, or
switch the ignition on, to restore function to
these switches. You can switch this feature
on or off in the information display. See
General Information (page 120).
Note: Switch the ignition on and off after
changing the setting in the information
display.
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
The liftgate release button only operates
when your vehicle's speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three seconds
to unlock all doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to confirm the change.
Driver door mode only unlocks the driver
door when you press the unlock button
once. All door mode unlocks all doors when
72
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
you press the unlock button once. The
unlocking mode applies to the remote
control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access. You can also change between the
unlocking modes using the information
display. See General Information (page 120).
Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for at
least four seconds with the ignition off. The
direction indicators flash twice to confirm the
change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
The direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
door lock again, the horn sounds and the
direction indicators flash if all the doors and
the liftgate are closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the direction
indicators do not flash. You can switch
this feature on or off in the information
display. See General Information (page
120).
Opening the Liftgate
E267940
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.
Activating Intelligent Access
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle without
taking the keys out of your pocket or purse
when your intelligent access key is within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access
uses a sensor on the back of the door handle
for unlocking and a separate sensor on the
face of each door handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the key
is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 62).
73
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248553
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor
on the back of the door handle for a brief
period and then pull on the door handle to
unlock, being careful to not touch the lock
sensor at the same time or pulling the door
handle too quickly. The intelligent access
system requires a brief delay to authenticate
your intelligent access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248554
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle to
confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
At the Luggage Compartment
E247050
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, press the exterior
release button.
74
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with
the Key Blade
A key cylinder is located under the driver
side door handle. You can use your key
blade to manually lock and unlock the driver
side door. See Remote Control (page 62).
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all the doors
immediately unlock and the horn sounds
twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off, or to the accessory
position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
75
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 120).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Approach Detection Illumination
When you approach your vehicle and a valid
key is detected, the exterior door handles
and some exterior lamps illuminate.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts
off when it detects a certain amount of
battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E138637
76
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Unlock the liftgate glass.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner's wallet card in the glove box
and is available from an authorized dealer.
You can also program up to five of your own
five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must press each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry code
through the information display.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times. This
mode turns off the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the remote
control.
• Switching the ignition on.
Locking and Unlocking
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code to unlock all doors.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
with the driver door closed to lock all doors.
You do not need to enter the keypad code
first.
77
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
To Unlock the Liftgate Glass
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code, then press 5·6 to unlock the
liftgate glass.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: Two programmed intelligent access
keys are required for this procedure.
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring facing upward,
place the first intelligent access key into
the backup slot inside the center console.
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait for a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the intelligent access
key from the center console.
5. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot in the center console,
then press the push button ignition
switch.
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
78
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the tailgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent passengers
and cargo from falling out. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One tone sounds if the ignition is on and
the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three tones sound if the battery voltage
is below the minimum operating voltage.
• One tone sounds if the vehicle speed is
at or above 3 mph (5 km/h)
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds and
the liftgate closes under control. Remove
any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
using the power liftgate control.
79
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Liftgate
Note: Objects too close to your vehicle, for
example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. Make sure the area behind
your vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel.
Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within a few
seconds.
Outside Control
E247048
Liftgate window. See Liftgate
Window (page 111).
A
Liftgate.B
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
2. Press button B.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure
or damage mechanical components.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate when it is in motion. This could
damage the power liftgate and its
components.
80
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Liftgate
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when it
reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving,
you can also manually move it to the desired
height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control button
on the liftgate until a tone sounds,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the power
liftgate, you can manually move it to a
different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after you
have programmed a lower height than fully
open, you can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three tones sound and the system
reverses to open. When you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle when the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
when driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate.
Using the Hands-Free Liftgate (If Equipped)
Make sure you have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
3. The liftgate power opens or closes.
81
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Liftgate
Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch
E253664
The detection area is in the center of the rear
bumper.
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch
E253799
The detection area is on the left-hand side
and right-hand side of the hitch, between the
exhaust and the hitch.
Avoid the following actions when using
hands-free opening:
• Making physical contact with the bumper.
• Holding your foot under the bumper.
• Sweeping your foot from side to side, or
kicking at an odd angle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure,
or damage mechanical components.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when you wash your
vehicle.
82
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
aftermarket remote start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting the
engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and
restart the engine if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. The intended design is to help
prevent the engine from starting unless a
coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may appear
in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
If you switch the ignition on with a coded key
you disarm the vehicle. If you unlock the
doors with the touch handle you disarm the
alarm.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: Do not place the device on the
wireless accessory charging area when
programming intelligent access keys.
83
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Security
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access key readily accessible. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Carry out all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you carry out any steps out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E247437
2. Open the center console storage
compartment lid.
3. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
4. Press the push button ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
7. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
8. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
9. Remove the intelligent access key.
10. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
11. Once complete, the information cluster
displays a message confirming the key
has been programmed. The direction
indicators flash and the horn sounds.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If it
still does not work, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
84
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Security
ANTI-THEFT ALARM - VEHICLES
WITH: INTERIOR SENSOR
Alarm System
Perimeter Alarm
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle through
the doors and the hood.
Interior Sensors
Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unit
sensors.
The interior lamp unit sensors are in the
overhead console. The sensors act as a
deterrent against unauthorized intrusion by
sensing any movement inside your vehicle.
Inclination Sensors
When you lock your vehicle and arm the
alarm, the sensors are designed to detect
an attempt to raise your vehicle, for example
to remove a wheel or to tow it away.
Alarm Settings
ALL SENSORS ACTIVE is the standard
setting. In this mode, the interior sensors are
on when you arm the alarm.
In PERIMETER SENSING mode, the interior
sensors are off when you arm the alarm.
You can change the setting through the
information display. See General Information
(page 120).
Ask on Exit (If Equipped)
You can set the information display to ask
you each time which level of guard you wish
to set.
Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm triggers in any of the
following ways:
• If someone opens a door, the liftgate or
the hood without a valid key or remote
control.
• If you switch your vehicle on without a
correctly coded key.
• If the interior sensors detect movement
within your vehicle.
If the alarm triggers, the alarm horn sounds
for 30 seconds and the hazard flashers turn
on for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above triggers the alarm again.
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Doors and Locks (page 72).
85
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Security
Disarming the Alarm
Vehicles Without Keyless Entry
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching your
vehicle on with a correctly coded key, or by
unlocking the doors with the remote control.
Vehicles with Keyless Entry
Note: A valid remote control must be located
within the detection range of that door for
keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 76).
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching your vehicle on, or
by unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM - VEHICLES
WITH: ANTI-THEFT ALARM
SYSTEM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
86
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Security
USING POWER RUNNING BOARDS
WARNING: In extreme climates,
excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate more
slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door. This
can help you enter and exit your vehicle.
For vehicles with intelligent access, the
remote control determines your proximity to
the vehicle. As the remote control enters
approximately 8.9 ft (2.7 m) of the vehicle,
some exterior lights illuminate and the power
running boards deploy automatically. In
addition to deploying on both sides of the
vehicle, there is illumination around the
power running boards. The deployment is
configurable in the advanced settings of the
information display. If the configuration is
turned off, the power running boards do not
automatically deploy.
Note: Automatic power deploy approach
detection does not unlock or lock the vehicle.
It also does not interfere with the alarm
system.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after a
two-second delay.
87
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the advanced settings of the
information display. See General
Information (page 120).
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the advanced
settings of the information display. See
General Information (page 120).
• When disabled (OFF), the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction and
move to the end of travel if it encounters an
object while moving.
88
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 158).
E261582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
stops just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 167).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch the
ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return
the system to its previous settings. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
120).
89
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column
may move up and in.
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
E221073
Seek down or previous.A
Volume up or down and mute.B
Seek up or next.C
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E142599
Press and release to activate voice
recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type One
E221071
See Using Cruise Control (page 255).
90
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E223599
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
256).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E221074
E221072
See Information Displays (page 120).
Note: The HUD button replaces the DISP
button on vehicles that have a head up
display (HUD).
Note: The NAV button is replaced with a
compass button on vehicles without
navigation.
91
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and off
using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
92
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Never use the pedal
adjustment controls when your feet are on
the accelerator or brake pedal when the
vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
E176213
Farther.A
Closer.B
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 167).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
93
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Pedals
AUTOWIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps automatically
turn on when the windshield wipers
continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
E247166
On.A
High sensitivity.B
Low sensitivity.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the autowipers. When you select low
sensitivity, the wipers operate when the
sensor detects a large amount of water on
the windshield. When you select high
sensitivity, the wipers operate when the
sensor detects a small amount of water on
the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit
the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on the
windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers default to on and remain on until
you switch them off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers, the
wipers operate in intermittent mode. See
General Information (page 120).
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit
The rain sensing feature will not operate
when you place the vehicle in RUN position,
the vehicle is stationary and the outside
temperature is below 32°F (0°C). You can
manually switch on the wipers by adjusting
the rain sensor sensitivity or adjusting the
wiper speed.
This prevents damage to the wipers from ice
and snow on the windshield.
94
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E269412
E270967
Pull the lever toward you to
operate the windshield washers.
When you release the lever, the wipers
operate for a short time. When activated, a
courtesy wipe occurs a short time after the
wipers stop to clear any remaining washer
fluid.
Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
off in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 125).
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also turns
on the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
E242324
C
Intermittent wipe.A
Continuous wipe.B
Rear window wiper off.C
Depending on your vehicle, when you switch
on the front wipers and move the gearshift
lever to reverse (R), the rear intermittent wipe
may turn on.
95
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
Note: Make sure you switch the rear window
wiper off before entering a car wash.
Rear Window Washer
E269727
Push the lever away from you to operate the
rear window washer. When you release the
lever, the wipers operate for a short time.
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
96
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes in
air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
B
Headlamp low beam.C
97
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
Headlamp High Beam
E273182
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E273181
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps turn on in low light
situations, or when the wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
98
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect and connect the
battery, or fully discharge and charge the
battery, the illuminated components switch
to the maximum setting.
E254204
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with any
door open or 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed. You can cancel this feature
by pulling the direction indicator toward you
again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Type One - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions, or
releasing the parking brake for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
99
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 120).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions, or
releasing the parking brake for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in all
switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps
or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the
system turns off high beams before they can
distract other road users. Low beams remain
on.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to turn the high beams
on and off.
Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
100
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
The system turns the high beams off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
120).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position. See Autolamps (page 98).
Overriding the System
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
Automatic High Beam Indicator
The indicator illuminates to confirm
when the system is ready to assist.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E254003
Press to switch the fog lamps on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except off
and the high beams are not on.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
This vehicle is equipped with a dynamic
automatic leveling system. The headlamps
do not require additional aim adjustment.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
Speed Dependent Lamps
There are add on light sources within the
headlamp that provide additional light on the
road depending on your vehicle speed and
steering wheel input.
A. Standard low beam.
B. Additional lighting.
101
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
E275680
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E247171
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicator flashes three times and stops.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicator flashes for as long as you hold
the lever in this position.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They project an image onto the
ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat turns on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors fold in
upon locking or using the switch on the door.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
102
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in to the door window glass,
the welcome mats do not turn on.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the all lamps on button on the
overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp
E262162
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the
overhead console depends on your vehicle.
All Lamps On
Press to switch all interior lamps
on.
All Lamps Off
E262185
Press to switch all interior lamps
off.
Individual Dome Lamps
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Interior Lamp Function
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
When the interior lamp function is off and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps stay off.
When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps turn on.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber when
the door function is off.
Individual Map Lamps
Press a map lens to switch individual map
lamps on and off independently.
103
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or off.
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E279027
Select ambient lighting.
E273192
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Touch a color once.
Changing the Color
Touch any color once.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the selected color up or down.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the selected color once or drag the
selected color down to zero brightness.
104
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify they are free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until the
you fully close the door window.
Continue to hold the switch for a few
seconds after you close the window.
2. Release the window switch.
3. Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window.
4. Release the window switch.
5. Lift and hold the window switch until you
fully close the window.
6. Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and
one-touch up features.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the
bounce-back feature the window will not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
105
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 120).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not use an ice scraper on the mirror
glass or housing.
106
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E176219
Left-hand mirror.A
Right-hand mirror.B
Adjustment control.C
Window lockout.D
Power-folding mirror control.E
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control will light.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), turn off the vehicle,
open and close the driver's side door and
lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the vehicle
and open and close the driver's side door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See General
Information (page 120).
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
located on the door. The control lights and
the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.
Note: If you use the power-folding control to
fold the mirrors on demand and the auto fold
feature is switched on, you must use the
control again to unfold them.
107
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to reset
them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time the mirrors are manually
folded.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 156).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 167).
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver’s exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror
turns on.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Lincoln Welcome Mat
Projection lights, on the bottom of the mirror
housings, project an image onto the ground
a short distance from the vehicle.
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 252).
Blind Spot Monitor
See Blind Spot Information System (page
271).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
108
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright
light from behind. It returns to normal when
the bright light from behind is no longer
present or if you shift into reverse (R).
CHILDMINDER MIRROR
On overhead consoles, the childminder
mirror allows the driver to view the rear
seating area.
WARNING: Do not use the
childminder mirror to view rearward traffic,
do not allow rear passengers to distract
you from the driving task, and make sure
the rear view mirror has a clear view of
rearward traffic. Failure to do so could
increase the risk of a crash from an unseen
vehicle, which may result in serious injury.
E190497
Pull down the rear edge of the childminder
mirror to open. You can adjust the
childminder mirror to any position up to full
open to aid in visibility.
TOLL READER
Installing the Toll Reader
Install the toll reader or radio-controlled
equipment on the driver side of the
windshield behind the interior mirror.
Note: Follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
E274072
109
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the moonroof. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation, press
the control a second time.
110
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E258458
Moonroof open.A
Moonroof vent.B
Sunshade open.C
Sunshade close.D
Moonroof close.E
Note: If you press and hold the moonroof
open or sunshade open buttons, the
moonroof or sunshade moves proportionally
to how long you hold the button. The same
also applies to the moonroof close and
sunshade close buttons.
Moonroof Open
Press and immediately release to fully open
the moonroof. If there is a comfort stop
position, the moonroof first opens to the
comfort stop position. Press and immediately
release the control again to open the
moonroof fully.
Moonroof Vent
Press and release to vent the moonroof.
Sunshade Open
Press and release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open the sunshade
with the moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the control again.
Sunshade Close
Press and release to close the sunshade.
Note: The sunshade does not fully close
unless the moonroof glass is fully closed.
Moonroof Close
Press and release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent positions.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses some
distance if an obstacle is detected while
closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.
LIFTGATE WINDOW
Opening the Liftgate Window
Note: To avoid vehicle damage, use care
when operating the liftgate when the liftgate
window is open.
111
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
With the Outside Control Buttons
E247048
Liftgate window.A
Liftgate.B
1. Press button A.
2. Pull the liftgate window upward.
With the Keypad
The liftgate window also opens with the
keypad. See Keyless Entry (page 76).
112
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Note: Clusters shown in single gauge view.
E271984
113
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Status Bar.A
Speedometer.B
Right Information Group.C
Fuel Gauge.D
Coolant Gauge.E
Left Information Group.F
Status Bar
Displays information related to the current
audio source, compass direction and outside
air temperature.
Left and Right Information Group
Information that appears depends on current
gauge view and on-demand settings. See
General Information (page 120).
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of your vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty reaches
75 mi (120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at
50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km)
and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
114
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator (If
Equipped)
E144524
It illuminates when you switch the
system on.
It illuminates white when the
system is in standby mode. It illuminates
green when you set the adaptive cruise
speed.
See Using Cruise Control (page 255).
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Auto Hold Active
E197933
Illuminates when the system holds
your vehicle stationary.
Auto Hold Unavailable
E197934
Illuminates when the system is on,
but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator
It illuminates when the engine has
automatically stopped. It flashes
to inform you when the engine
needs to restart. The indicator is shown with
a strikethrough if the system is not available.
See Auto-Start-Stop (page 196).
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when the system
automatically turns the headlamp
high beam on.
See Automatic High Beam Control (page
100).
Battery
It illuminates when you switch the
ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine is
running this indicates a malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Blind Spot Monitor
E151262
It illuminates when you switch the
system off.
See Blind Spot Information
System (page 271).
115
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and will
illuminate when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates when you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Make sure
the parking brake is off. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as
possible if the lamp continues to
illuminate.
Cruise Control Indicator
E71340
It illuminates when you switch the
system on.
See Using Cruise Control (page
255).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. Flashes
during operation. An increase in the rate of
flashing warns of a failed indicator bulb.
Door Ajar
It illuminates when you switch the
ignition on and remains on if any
door or the hood is open.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric Parking
Brake (page 226).
Electronic Limited Slip Differential (If
Equipped)
E163170
Illuminates when using the
electronic limited slip differential.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp
If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, this indicates that the
engine is overheating. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
116
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
See Engine Coolant Check (page 364).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level.
See Engine Oil Check (page 362).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Rear Seatbelt (If Equipped)
E206718
Illuminates and a chime sounds to
signal the rear seatbelts are not
buckled.
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a chime sounds
until you fasten the seatbelts.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators
E181778
Illuminates momentarily when you
select two-wheel drive high.
E181781
Illuminates when the automatic
four-wheel drive system is
engaged.
E181780
Illuminates when four-wheel drive
low is engaged.
E181779
Illuminates when four-wheel drive
high is engaged.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked.
Headlamp High Beam Indicator
It illuminates when you switch the
headlamp high beam on. It flashes
when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent on.
Hood Ajar
E246598
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Displays when the ignition is on
and the liftgate is not completely
closed.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as possible.
117
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Low Beam Malfunction Warning Lamp
E181350
It illuminates when there is a
malfunction with the low beam
headlamp bulb.
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Lamp
E132353
It illuminates when the washer fluid
is low.
Parking Lamps
Illuminates when you switch the
parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an 4WD fault has been detected.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine is
running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring.
Increased exhaust gas temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter or other
vehicle components. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
immediately serviced.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Catalytic Converter (page 207).
Stability Control and Traction Control
Indicator
E138639
Flashes during operation.
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or remains
on when the engine is running, this indicates
a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
See Using Stability Control (page 233).
118
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control and Traction Control
Off Warning Lamp
E130458
It illuminates when you switch the
system off.
Tow Haul Indicator (If Equipped)
E246592
It illuminates when you switch the
system on.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
119
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the quick action menu (QAM)
buttons on the right-hand side of the steering
wheel. The information display provides the
corresponding information.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are optional.
Note: Trailer options are not available if your
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A check
in the box indicates the feature is
on, and unchecked indicates the feature is
off.
120
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Information Display Controls
E247519
Back Button.A
Toggle Up.B
OK Button.C
Toggle Down.D
Phone QAM Buttons.E
Audio QAM Button.F
Navigation QAM Button.G
Settings QAM Button.H
Display QAM Button.I
Note: The DISP button is replaced with a
HUD button on vehicles equipped with a
head up display (HUD). See Head Up
Display (page 148).
Note: The NAV button is replaced with a
compass button on vehicles without
navigation.
• Press one of the QAM buttons to enter a
menu.
• Toggle (B) and (D) to scroll through and
highlight the options within a menu.
• Press (C) to enter a sub-menu.
• Press (A) to exit a menu.
• Press the open menu's QAM button at
any time to close the menu (escape
button).
• Press (C) to choose and confirm settings
or messages.
121
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
SETTINGS
SPEEDOMETER km/hDISPLAY SETUP
SPEEDOMETER MPH
ADD TACHOMETER TO VIEW
Enter the submenu and select your settingMEASUREMENT UNITS
TEMPERATURE
TIRE PRESSURE
LANGUAGE
TRACTION CONTROL
HILL DESCENT
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
Enter the submenu and select your settingTOW HAUL
BLIND SPOTDRIVER ASSIST-
ANCE
TRAILER BLINDSPOT
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
Enter the submenu and select your settingCRUISE CONTROL
122
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
SETTINGS
DRIVER ALERT
Enter the submenu and select your settingLANE KEEPING SYSTEM
PRE-COLLISION
Enter the submenu and select your settingTRAILER STATUSTOWING
TRAILER OPTIONS
CONNECTION CHECKLIST
ALARMVEHICLEADVANCED
SETTINGS
AUTO ENGINE OFF
EASY ENTRY/EXIT
LIGHTING
LOCKS
MIRRORS
NEUTRAL TOW
OIL LIFE RESET
POWER LIFTGATE
REMOTE START
123
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
SETTINGS
POWER RUNNING BOARD
TIRE MONITOR
WINDOWS
WIPERS
Enter the submenu and select your settingMyKey
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active trailer still accumulates miles even after you
physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with a head up display, use the DISP button to access your DISPLAY SETUP options.
Information Screens
INFO/TRIP/FUEL On Demand information
appears on the right-hand side of your
instrument cluster in single gauge view and
in the center of your instrument cluster when
ADD TACHOMETER TO VIEW is switched
on.
INFO/TRIP/FUEL
NO CONTENT
TRIP 1
TRIP 2
FUEL ECONOMY
SEATBELTS
INFO/TRIP/FUEL
124
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
INFO/TRIP/FUEL
TIRE PRESSURE
TRAILER INFORMATION
• NO CONTENT - Displays a blank area.
• TRIP 1 - Displays distance traveled,
average fuel economy, and time spent
for trip. Press and hold OK to reset.
• TRIP 2 information is the same as
TRIP 1.
• FUEL ECONOMY - Displays your
vehicle's average fuel economy. Press
and hold OK to reset.
• SEATBELTS - Displays a graphic of the
connection status of the rear seatbelts.
• TIRE PRESSURE - Displays a graphic of
current vehicle tire pressures.
• TRAILER INFORMATION - Displays the
transmission temperature and trailer gain.
Head Up Display (If Equipped)
See Head Up Display (page 148).
Phone
See General Information (page 441).
Audio
See General Information (page 441).
Navigation (If Equipped)
See General Information (page 441).
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E222314
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
125
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 256).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 256).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in
front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 256).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate
126
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Headlamps
ActionMessage
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Check Headlamp System See Manual
Alarm
ActionMessage
The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 86).Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Vehicle Shuts Off In {seconds:#0} Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Vehicle Shut Off to Save Energy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Vehicle Shuts Off in {seconds:#0} Seconds
Press Ok to Override
127
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System Service Soon
The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Charging System Service Now
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
your ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you restart
your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered.
Battery State of Charge Low
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle
has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
Displayed when the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition.
Various vehicle features will be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has
recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
128
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 271).
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 271).Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 271).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
The system automatically turns off and displays this message when you connect a trailer to the
vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot
system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page 271).
Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message when you connect a trailer to the
vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot
system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page 271).
Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer
Attached
Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or gooseneck, or when the trailer width is
wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or longer than 33 ft (10 m).
Trailer Blind Spot Not available Due to
Invalid Trailer
129
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the engine is on.Engine ON
Displays when the hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited Security Mode
There is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Child Lock Malfunction Service Required
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been reset. See Keyless Entry (page
76).
Factory Keypad Code {X X X X X}
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
130
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Drivetrain
ActionMessage
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential system encounters a hardware failure. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Check Electronic Limited Slip Differential
Displays if an electronic limited slip differential system fault is present. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Electronic Limited Slip Differential Off See
Owner's Manual
Displays when the electronic limited slip differential system resumes normal function.Electronic Limited Slip Differential Restored
to Normal
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential system temporarily turns off due to overheating
or an undersized spare tire. If an undersized spare tire is installed, replace the spare tire with a
full-sized tire as soon as possible. If not, stop the vehicle in a safe location and allow the system
to cool.
Electronic Limited Slip Differential
Temporarily Disabled
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential has limited functionality. This could be due to
an undersized spare tire or caused by the system overheating. If an undersized spare tire is
installed, replace the spare tire with a full-sized tire as soon as possible. If an undersized spare
tire is not installed, the vehicle has reduced functionality. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Electronic Limited Slip Differential Reduced
Torque
131
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you select a drive mode that does not allow the electronic limited slip differential
to turn on. This may also display when the electronic limited slip differential has a fault and the
vehicle requests the locking feature.
Electronic Limited Slip Differential Locking
Feature Not Available
The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message indicates that your vehicle is safe to
be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission
in Neutral
The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message indicates that your vehicle is NOT
safe to be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
Four-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Check 4x4
The 4X4 system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and you do not shift the
transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and your vehicle's speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW and you do not shift the
transmission to neutral (N).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
132
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW and your vehicle's speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
May display when there is a transfer case gear tooth blockage while shifting to
or from 4L or to the neutral state.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward
Displays when the system turns off the clutch due to excessive stress. The system
automatically turns on the clutch after it cools.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
Displays when the 4X4 system has been restored to its original setting.4x4 Restored
Displays when the 4X4 system temporarily turns on 4H from 4A after detecting
driving conditions that require greater 4X4 performance. The system automatically
returns to 4A after the system no longer detects these driving conditions.
4x4 Temporarily Locked
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
133
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your authorized dealer. See Hill Start
Assist (page 228).
Hill Start Assist Not Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 191).No Key Detected
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not
detected inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Full Accessory Power Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is programmed to the system.Key Program Successful
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have been programmed.Max Number of Keys Learned
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key has failed to be
programmed.
Key Program Failure
134
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough keys have been programmed.Not Enough Keys Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
Displays when the vehicle is switched off.Vehicle Switched Off
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
135
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See General Maintenance Information (page 547).Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See General Maintenance Information (page 547).Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 370).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature.Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
The brake system has reduced stopping power.Brake Applied Power Reduced
136
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming.MyKey not Created
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is reached.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activated.AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings.Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
137
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Off Road
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is active.Hill Descent Control Active
Hill descent control mode is inactive.Hill Descent Control OFF
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met.For Hill Descent Reduce Speed XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent mode.For Hill Descent Select Gear
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must resume control.Hill Descent Driver Resume Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling
The hill descent control system is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See
Side Sensing System (page 239).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See
Rear Parking Aid (page 237).
Check Rear Park Aid
138
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal
being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be performed.
Perform a manual release.
Park Brake Use Switch to Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park
brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode that is used to allow service
of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance Mode
139
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality
may still be available. Contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function Service
Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system. Wait 2 minutes before attempting
to apply again.
Park Brake System Overheated
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
140
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
ActionMessage
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ can only be activated when the vehicle is stopped.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Not Active Stop Vehicle to
Activate
Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until the sticker is found before
attempting to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Locating Sticker Please wait...
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ has reached max trailer angle.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer angle
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ is no longer controlling steering.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control of
Steering Wheel
Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exit speed for the Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Reduce Speed Turn Knob to
Steer Press Knob to Exit
141
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation are not met. See Trailer
Reversing Aids (page 298).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ cannot operate with hands on wheel. Remove hands
to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Remove Hands from Steering
Wheel to Activate Press Knob to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ knob has been pushed to deactivate the system.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Cancelled by Driver Take Control
of Steering Wheel
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ operation is only available in reverse gear. Shift gear
selector into reverse to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shift to Reverse to Activate.
Press Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sticker Not Found Shift to Park
Press Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 298).Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sticker Not Found Refer to
Owner's Manual. Press Knob to Exit
Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straight forward to calibrate Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Drive Straight Forward to
Calibrate. Press Knob to Exit
The system has completed calibration. Stop the vehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup
Assist™ feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Calibration Complete Stop
Vehicle
142
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift button to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift
Button
Seats
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory {0} Saved
Stability Control
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On
143
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.To START Press Brake
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start the vehicle.Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 405).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 405).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more information on
how the system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
405). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
144
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Trailer
ActionMessage
The current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0}
The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is not connected.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} No Trailer
Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control Module followed by a single
chime. See Towing a Trailer (page 297).
Trailer Brake Module Fault
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle.Trailer Connected
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
See Towing a Trailer (page 297).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing a Trailer (page 297).Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module. See Towing a Trailer
(page 297).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure.Trailer Tire Low Specified:
145
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Capability Not Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup. See General Information
(page 120).
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not Setup See Manual
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position other than park (P).Shift to Park
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.Transmission Warming Up Please Wait
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.Press Brake Pedal
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.Transmission Over Temperature Stop
Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service Required
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
146
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized dealer.Transmission Limited Function See Manual
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or recharging
the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
371).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the Vehicle
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to park. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to reverse. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
147
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to enable the transmission to shift from
park.
Depress Brake to Shift from Park
Displays when Stay in Neutral Mode is active. See Automatic Transmission (page 210).Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged
Displays when the neutral button N needs to be pressed again to enter Stay in Neutral Mode.
See Automatic Transmission (page 210).
To Stay in Neutral When Exiting Vehicle
Select N Again
HEAD UP DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
Head Up Display (HUD)
This is a visual system that shows information
in your field of view as you drive. The
information comes from various vehicle
systems and includes vehicle speed, speed
limit, navigation, and advanced driver
assistance systems (ADAS), such as adaptive
cruise control (ACC) and the lane keeping
system. This system projects the information
off the windshield, and focuses the image
near the end of the hood approximately 7 ft
(2 m) in front of the driver. Viewing this
information does not require you to
significantly move your head, allowing you
to keep your eyes on the road while having
quick and easy access to information.
Head Up Display Information
E228521
Signaling and Traffic Indication.A
Left Information Group.B
ADAS Display Area.C
148
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Navigation Display Area.D
Status Bar.E
Speedometer Display Area.F
Signaling and Traffic Indication
Displays direction indicators, blind spot
information (if direction indicators are active)
and cross traffic alert.
Left Information Group
Displays incoming call information.
ADAS Display Area
Displays ACC and lane keeping system
status and warnings.
Navigation Display Area
Displays navigation next turn instructions.
Status Bar
Displays distance to empty (DTE), time and
outside air temperature. Next to DTE, the
fuel gauge fill color changes to yellow in low
fuel conditions. You can switch off the status
bar in the HUD settings menu.
Speedometer Display Area
Displays current vehicle speed, speed limit
(if available in the map database) and your
transmission gear selection.
Configuring The Head Up Display
You can control the system's options through
the information display by using the HUD,
OK and arrow buttons on the right-hand side
of your steering wheel. See General
Information (page 120). You can adjust the
display according to your height to make
viewing the content easier. You can also
adjust what content displays and the
brightness of the content. The system's
options appear in the instrument cluster
while the updates happen in the HUD.
Note: If HUD On is unchecked, other options
of the system are hidden.
Note: The HUD menu automatically closes
after a certain period of inactivity.
Note: The HUD image brightness
automatically adjusts to the brightness of
the ambient environment. You have the
ability to adjust the brightness further
according to your preference.
Note: In some instances, sunlight can cause
some reflections in and around the HUD
image.
149
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Head-Up Display (HUD)
Turns the HUD on and off.HUD On
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings.Brightness
Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Vertical PositionHUD Adjustments
Image Rotation
Turns the distance to empty, time and temperature on and off.HUD Content
Select Your SettingCruise and Lane Control
Note: When you save a memory preset position, your current HUD settings are also saved to that memory preset position. See Memory
Function (page 167).
150
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
Maintaining Your Head Up Display
• Do not place objects onto the transparent
cover, as they may block you from seeing
portions of the image. These objects
could also damage the cover and affect
the quality of the projected image.
• The system uses a special windshield
designed to provide the optimum image
quality. You must replace the windshield
in a vehicle with this system with a
certified original equipment
manufactured (OEM) head up display
windshield. Replacing this system's
windshield with a non-head up display
windshield causes a double image or
distorted image. Have an authorized
dealer or authorized repair facility replace
the windshield.
• Light conditions such as oncoming
headlamps, sunrise, sunset or reflections
off of wet road surfaces can affect the
driver's ability to see the HUD image.
• Clean the windshield often for optimal
HUD performance. See Cleaning the
Windows and Wiper Blades (page 381).
151
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius through the
touchscreen
Note: You can control some of the climate
features through the touchscreen.
Accessing the Climate Control Menu
E265038
Press and release the button to
access additional controls for the
front climate system. See SYNC™
3 (page 441).
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Press and release the button to
access additional controls for the
rear climate system. See SYNC™
3 (page 441).
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle.
Note: The blower motor speed may reduce
when using the voice commands of the
SYNC system. Press and hold the A/C and
recirculated air buttons simultaneously and
increase the blower motor speed to disable
or re-enable this feature.
Setting the Temperature
Press the toggle button on the left-hand side
of the climate control upward or downward
to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Press the toggle button on the right-hand
side of the climate control upward or
downward to set the right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
cycle through the automatic
settings and off, then set the
temperature.
When three indicators are on, the blower
motor adjusts to the highest speed to reach
the selected temperature as quickly as
possible.
When two indicators are on, the blower
motor adjusts to a medium speed to reach
the selected temperature with a reduced
amount of cabin noise.
152
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Climate Control
When one indicator is on, the blower motor
adjusts to the lowest speed to reach the
selected temperature with the least amount
of cabin noise.
Note: The system starts at the previous fan
setting when you switch on AUTO.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone
mode by pressing and holding the button for
more than two seconds.
Switching Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to
distribute air through the
windshield air vents and de-mister.
Air directed to the instrument panel and
footwell air vents turns off. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear the windshield
of a thin covering of ice.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example,
maximum defrost) the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various heat
settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 177).
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning
On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to
LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior (when
used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or
prevent you from switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off
E268558
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various
ventilated seat settings and off.
See Climate Controlled Seats (page 179).
153
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool the
interior to the temperature you select as
quickly as possible.
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs air flow to
the windshield and side window air vents. In
addition, the blower motor may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather
1. Press and release defrost.
154
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the overhead air
vents.
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air
Vents
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to rear footwell air
vents.
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front controls.
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of air
circulated in the rear passenger
compartment.
Setting the Rear Temperature
E265862
Turn the control to set the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on rear automatic operation,
then set the temperature.
155
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Climate Control
Switching the Rear Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On
and Off
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various heat
settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 177).
HEATED WINDSHIELD (IF EQUIPPED)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer
The windshield wiper de-icer turns on in low
temperatures.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off after
a short period of time.
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle Warranty may not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the
glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
156
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Climate Control
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 547).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The climate control system adjusts the
interior temperature during remote start.
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display controls. See Information Displays
(page 120).
You cannot adjust the climate control setting
during remote start operation. Switch the
ignition on to make adjustments.
Based on your remote start settings, the
following vehicle-dependent features may
or may not remain on after remote starting
your vehicle:
• Climate controlled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
• Windshield wiper de-icer.
Note: For dual zone climate controlled seats,
the passenger seat setting defaults to match
the driver seat during remote start.
Automatic Settings
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or
cools the vehicle interior as required to
achieve comfort.
Note: In cold weather, the heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
Last Settings
If Last Settings is on, the system uses the
settings last selected before you turned off
the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features
In Auto mode, certain heated features may
switch on during cold weather, and cooled
features during hot weather.
157
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death in the event of
a sudden stop or crash.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30° from the
upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt
over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
158
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Manual Head Restraints
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel posts.B
Guide sleeve with adjust and
release button.
C
Guide sleeve without button.D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold button C.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Note: You cannot remove front seat head
restraints that have entertainment system
video screens.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel posts into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
159
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Tilting Manual Head Restraints
The front seat head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Power Front Head Restraints (If Equipped)
E222280
To raise the head restraint, lift the switch up
until you reach a comfortable height.
To lower the head restraint, press the switch
down.
To move the head restraint forward, push
the switch forward until you reach the
desired position.
To move the head restraint rearward, push
the switch rearward.
Second Row Outermost Head Restraints
The outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them
rearward.
160
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
E257663
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel posts.B
Guide sleeve with unlock and
remove button.
C
A fold button.D
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold both C buttons.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel posts into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Note: Make sure the head restraint fold
button is facing the outboard side of the
seat.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press button D to fold the head restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it back
to the upright position.
Second Row Center Seat Head Restraint
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel posts.B
Guide sleeve with adjust and
release button.
C
Guide sleeve with unlock and
remove button.
D
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
161
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel posts into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them.
E193964
The head restraints consist of:
• An energy absorbing foam and structure.
• A fold button.
1. Press the button to fold the head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it back
in the upright position.
Power Rear Head Restraints
The third row outermost head restraints are
fixed and cannot be removed.
E255798
Press the button on the overhead console
to fold the third row outermost head
restraints.
Pull the head restraint up to place it in the
upright position.
Note: These head restraints fold when you
press the fold flat button.
162
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
The power seat controls are on the door.
E254492
Memory Function.A
Head Restraints.B
Upper Seat Backrest.C
Multi-Contour.D
Seat Cushion Adjustment.E
Power Seats.F
Recline.G
163
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
E254489
164
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E222308
Adjusting the Length of the Seat Cushion
E221053
Press the top of the control to adjust the left
side of the cushion.
Press the bottom of the control to adjust the
right side of the cushion.
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seat backrest and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
165
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
E222219
Massage Mode
Massage intensity increaseA
Massage feature selectionB
Massage intensity decreaseC
On and offD
166
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
You can also adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
E142607
Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour
Seats.
When switched on, the system displays
directions for you to adjust the lumbar
settings in your seat or to set the massage
function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Choose the seat you would like to adjust.
2. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour Seats.
2. Choose the seat you would like to adjust.
3. Press OFF, Low or High.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
Driver Seat Memory
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Power adjustable foot pedals.
• Power steering column.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E222235
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
167
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features move to the position
stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a driver seat preset
memory position when the ignition is off, or
when the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N) (and your vehicle is not moving)
if the ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Recalling a personal profile in your SYNC
3 menu.
Note: Using a linked keyfob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you
switch the ignition off.
The driver seat returns to its previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 120).
Passenger Seat Memory
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the passenger seat. The memory control
is on the passenger door.
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Adjust the passenger seat to your
desired position.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired position. The
passenger seat features move to the position
stored for that preset. You can recall a
passenger seat preset memory at any time.
168
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Personal Profiles
This feature allows you to create multiple
personal profiles enabling users to
personalize vehicle’s settings. You can
create one profile for each preset memory
seat button along with a guest profile. You
can recall a profile using SYNC 3 or the
preset button you selected when you created
your profile. You can also link a keyfob to
your profile, which is used to recall it.
Creating a Personal Profile
Use the SYNC display to create a personal
profile.
1. Switch the ignition on and leave the
vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button under
Settings.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
Linking a Personal Profile to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Keyfob
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys, by assigning a keyfob to a
personal profile in your SYNC 3.
Use the SYNC display to link a keyfob to a
personal profile.
1. Switch the ignition on and leave the
vehicle in park (P).
2. Select the Personal Profiles button under
Settings.
3. Touch the arrow for the profile you wish
to link a keyfob to.
4. Select the Link Keyfob button.
5. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Note: The guest profile consists of existing
settings when there is no driver profile
created. After you create a driver profile, the
guest profile serves as an additional driver
profile.
Note: You cannot link a personalized name,
a memory seat button or a keyfob to a guest
profile.
Personal Settings
Personal profiles allow you to personalize
positional settings such as seats and mirrors,
as well as non-positional settings such as
radio, navigation, driver assist and system
settings. See SYNC™ 3 (page 441). You
cannot change the menu locations and
settings of those personalized features with
personal profiles.
Note: Non-positional settings are saved to
the active driver profile whenever you
change a setting.
Note: You can save positional settings if you
press and hold a memory seat button. See
Settings (page 504).
169
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Recalling and Changing a Profile
You can recall a profile by:
• Using a keyfob that has been linked to a
driver profile to access the remote start
feature, press an unlock button or open
the door with the exterior door handle.
• Pressing a memory seat button that has
been linked to a driver profile.
• Using the Personal Profiles menu on the
SYNC touchscreen.
Note: The recalled profile replaces the
previously active profile. If the active profile
is not your desired profile, you can change
it using any of the three methods listed.
When you switch on the personal profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a keyfob that is
not linked to a driver profile recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile. It will not change the positional
settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile or has not
been saved to a preset setting recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile. It will not change the positional
settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that is
not linked to a driver profile but has been
saved to a preset setting recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile. It recalls the positional settings
that you saved to that memory seat
button.
See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 524).
When you switch off the personal profiles
feature:
• Unlocking a door with a keyfob recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile and still recalls positional settings
from the driver profile which the keyfob
had been linked to.
• Pressing a memory seat button that has
not been linked to a driver profile or has
not been saved to a preset setting recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile. It will not change the positional
settings.
• Pressing a memory seat button that has
been linked to a driver profile or has
saved to a preset setting recalls
non-positional settings from the guest
profile. It recalls the positional settings
that you saved to that memory seat
button.
170
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
REAR SEATS
Folding the Second Row 40% Seat
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
E246710
1. Locate the handle on the side of the seat
cushion by the door.
2. Pull up on the handle to fold the seat
backrest.
Note: Use caution when folding the seat
backrest to the flat position as the seat
moves forward when you lift the release
handle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E246709
1. Lift the seat backrest toward the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seat backrest until you hear a
click, locking it in the upright position.
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost
40% Seat for Easy Entry
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
with a seat that is unlatched or in the
folded position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
171
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
Note: You can move the outermost seats
forward to allow access to the third row
seats.
This feature allows for easier entry and exit
to and from the third row seat.
E257686
1. Pull the lever.
2. Tilt the seat and slide the complete seat
forward.
172
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
E246708
3. When exiting your vehicle from the third
row seats, pull the lever up on the upper
corner of the outermost seats.
4. To return the seat to the seating position,
slide the seat rearward while pulling
down on the seat backrest until the latch
fully engages.
5. To move the seat further back, pull the
lever under the front of the seat and slide
it backward.
Note: You must move the seat to the full
forward position before you move it
rearward. Otherwise, the seat may not slide
properly rearward.
Note: You can slide the outermost seats
forward when using a child restraint.
Power Easy Entry (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
with a seat that is unlatched or in the
folded position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
173
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
The easy entry seat allows for easier entry
and exit to and from the third row seat.
E247495
1. Press the button on the rear quarter trim
panel to unlock the rear of the seat.
2. Push the seat forward to gain access to
the third row seat.
Reclining the Second Row Outermost
40% Seat Backrest
WARNING: Reclining the seatback
can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
E247681
The release handle is on the outermost side
of the seat cushion. Lift it to adjust the seat
backrest to your desired position.
Folding the Second Row Center 20%
Seat (If Equipped)
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make sure
that the seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.
174
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
E247331
The release handle is on the upper right seat
backrest. Pull the handle to release the
folding seat latch.
To return the seat to the upright position,
rotate the seat backrest until you hear a click,
locking it in the upright position.
Note: Use the same release handle to
recline the seat backrest.
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat (If Equipped)
Note: Move this seat forward to keep a child
in a child restraint close to the front seat
occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.
E247034
Lift the handle to move the seat forward or
rearward.
Power Folding Rear Seats
Note: Similar to the battery saver feature,
the power rear seat functions disable 10
minutes after you switch the ignition off. The
transmission must be in park (P) and the
liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open in
order to operate the seats.
Note: Be sure the third-row center head
restraint is in the lowered position before
you power the rear seats down. The
third-row outermost head restraints fold
when you press the fold button.
The control buttons are on the left-hand rear
quarter trim panel (accessible from the
liftgate area).
175
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
With Second-Row Bench Seats
E257920
With Second-Row Captain Chairs
E246705
Folds the left-hand third-row seat.A
Folds both third-row seats.B
Folds the right-hand third-row seat.C
Folds the left-hand second-row
seat.
D
Folds the second-row bench
center seat or both second-row
captain chair seats.
E
Folds the right-hand second-row
seat.
F
To return the second-row seat backrest to
the original position, rotate the seat backrest
up until it latches in the upright position. The
seat backrest clicks when it is locked into
position.
To return the third-row seat backrest to the
original position, press the corresponding
control again.
If the power rear seat is disabled after 10
minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Switching the ignition on.
176
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Folding Down the Rear Seats to the Load
Floor
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make sure
that the seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
The third-row seats have obstacle detection
that prevents the seats from folding or
returning if they are obstructed.
Power Recline
WARNING: Do not recline a rear seat
on which a child restraint is installed.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the child
restraint.
The third-row power recline buttons are on
the quarter trim panel on each side of the
vehicle.
E246706
Moves the seat backrest rearward.A
Moves the seat backrest forward.B
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Front Seats
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
177
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable
to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat
heater. The seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion,
because this may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with
pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater
to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
178
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Heated Seats
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
can cause the heated seat to overheat. Do
not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: The heated seats switch on during a
remote start if they are enabled through the
information displays. See General
Information (page 120).
Note: The heated seats may also switch on
when you start your vehicle if they were on
when you previously switched your vehicle
off.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
E146322
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various heat settings and off. More indicator
lights indicate warmer settings.
Ventilated Seats
Note: The ventilated seats switch on during
a remote start if they are enabled through
the information displays. See General
Information (page 120).
Note: The ventilated seats may also switch
on when you start your vehicle if they were
on when you previously switched your
vehicle off.
Note: Do not do the following:
179
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The ventilated seats only function when the
engine is running.
E224689
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
ventilated seats are on, the feature turns
itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Note: To improve comfort, use the ventilated
seats along with the vehicle’s air
conditioning system.
180
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Seats
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNING: Make sure that the
garage door and security device are free
from obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter integrated
into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
You can program garage doors as well as
entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
181
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button you want to program while
watching the indicator light on HomeLink.
Continue to hold the hand-held button
until the HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink button
is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press and
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence up to three
times to complete the programming process.
If your device still does not operate, you must
program your garage door. See
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
182
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the indicator light above
the buttons flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes, release
the buttons. You erased the codes for all
buttons.
183
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. End Users must follow the
specific operating instructions for satisfying
RF exposure compliance. This transmitter
must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user
and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
184
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This damages the
power point and may blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
USB Port and Power Point Locations
USB Ports and Power Points may be in the
following locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the front of the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
• 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.
Note: Some of the USB ports may not have
data transfer capabilities.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due to
powering multiple devices that can reach
beyond the 150 watt load limit and could
result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch off the ignition, when the vehicle is
not in accessory mode or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
185
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
E247586
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is ON or the vehicle is in
accessory mode.
• Off: The power point is OFF, the ignition
is OFF or the vehicle is not in accessory
mode.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
Due to the different technologies used on
its construction, some devices may exceed
the capacity shown on its label when they
are initially plugged-in.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGING (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we recommend
that you consult with your physician.
Note: Devices without built-in Qi wireless
charging receivers require an additional Qi
receiver or sleeve.
The system supports one Qi wireless
charging compatible device on the charging
area.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip, for
example passports, parking tickets or credit
cards, near the charging area when charging
a device. Damage may occur to the magnetic
strip.
186
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy wrappers,
on or near the charging area when charging
a device. Metal objects may heat up and
degrade the charging performance.
Note: The rate of charge, or charging power,
is controlled by the device. During charging,
the device and the charger may heat up, this
is normal. If the battery gets hotter than
usual, the charger may stop charging.
E250812
The charging area is on the center console
or lower instrument panel. See Center
Console (page 189).
You can charge a device if the vehicle is off
when in accessory mode or if SYNC is on.
To begin charging, place the device on the
center of the charging surface with the
charging side down. The charging stops after
your device reaches a full charge.
Note: If the system detects a foreign object
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
area, a message appears in the display.
DescriptionBehaviorMessage
This message appears when wireless charging
begins.
Message on screen display or pop-up window.Wireless Charger Active
The system stops charging your device if the
system detects the phone is misaligned, or a
foreign metal object is on the charging
surface.
Pop-up window.
Charging Terminated
Phone misaligned or object between phone
and charger detected. Correct the condition
to resume charging.
FCC ID: L2C0066T
187
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. There is no guarantee
that the interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, please consult
the dealer.
• This product is not end-user serviceable.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause interference,
and
• This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
188
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E247439
Front storage compartment with
USB ports, auxiliary power point
and wireless charger.
A
Cup holders with auxiliary storage
bin.
B
Storage compartment with auxiliary
power point.
C
Rear audio controls/Rear window
shade controls.
D
Rear climate controls.E
AC power point.F
Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter.
G
Rear cup holders.H
Dual USB port.I
Terrain management switch and
electric parking brake.
J
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E224352
189
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Storage Compartments
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
190
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km)
after you reconnect it. This is because the
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard any
unusual driving characteristics during this
period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a
cell phone.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the power on
and start your vehicle.
Note: A light on the button illuminates when
the ignition is on and when your vehicle
starts.
Switching the Ignition On
E144447
191
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Press the push button ignition switch once
without your foot on the brake pedal. It is on
the instrument panel near the steering wheel.
All electrical circuits and accessories are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
Press the push button ignition switch again
without your foot on the brake pedal to
switch the ignition off.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases.
This helps to warm up the engine. If the
engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. You cannot attempt
to start the engine for at least 15 minutes.
After 15 minutes, you are limited to a
15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle to shift the transmission
out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
E247437
192
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the passive key in this position, you
can use the push button ignition switch
to switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key. You
cannot start your vehicle if the system does
not detect a valid passive key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
automatically shuts down your vehicle if it
has been idling for an extended period. The
ignition also turns off to save battery power.
Before your vehicle shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down. If you do not
intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
your vehicle has shut down to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
193
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for example
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 120). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when the vehicle is still moving will result
in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
194
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power cable
and may cause an electrical short resulting
in fire, injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
195
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically stopping and restarting the
engine when your vehicle has stopped. The
engine restarts automatically when you
release the brake pedal.
In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort.
• To recharge the battery.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable,
Auto-Start-Stop is inhibited for a short time
after a refuel event when the system is
verifying the fuel type being used.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into
park (P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: Before opening the hood
or performing any maintenance, fully apply
the parking brake, shift into park (P) or
neutral (N) and switch the ignition off.
WARNING: Always switch the ignition
off before leaving the vehicle. If the ignition
is switched on an automatic restart may
occur at any time.
WARNING: The system may require
the engine to automatically restart when
the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green or flashes amber. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
120).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system automatically enables every time
you start your vehicle if:
• You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop
button (not illuminated).
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) after you have initially
started your vehicle.
• You have stopped your vehicle.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in drive.
• Not in Excite mode (enable by pressing
the Auto-Start-Stop button).
• The driver door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has cooled or
warmed to an acceptable level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
angle.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions, (with the battery state of
charge and temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
196
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Elevation is below about 11,000 ft
(3,350 m).
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
• If equipped with selectable drive modes
and when you select Normal, Conserve,
Slippery.
• The trailer is not connected.
• Tow haul mode not engaged.
• You have not selected Manual mode.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminates to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light, it
illuminates when automatic engine stop is
not available due to one of the above noted
conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions results in an
automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the brake
pedal at the same time.
• The driver seatbelt becomes unfastened
or the driver door is ajar.
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not meet
customer comfort when air conditioning
or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur and
the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• You have exceeded the maximum engine
off time.
• When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button with the engine automatically
stopped.
• The front defroster is turned to the Max
setting.
• When you shift into park (P) the engine
will restart.
Any of the following conditions may result in
an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have increased the blower fan speed
or changed the climate control
temperature.
• You have an electrical accessory turned
on or plugged in.
Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
197
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
E255783
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located on
the center console to switch the system off.
The button illuminates. This only deactivates
the system for the current ignition cycle.
Press the button again to restore
Auto-Start-Stop function.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. You must
restart the vehicle manually. See
Information Displays (page 120).
If your vehicle is in an engine off
Auto-Start-Stop state and you change the
transmission to reverse ®) when the brake
pedal is not pressed, the message
Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to Start Engine
appears. You must press the brake pedal
within 60 seconds or a shift to park (P) and
a manual restart is required.
198
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately
call a physician, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects
of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive
or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can
cause serious illness and permanent
injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through
the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin,
clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and thoroughly
wash your skin with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact
causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
fuel vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. Immediately call a physician if
you experience any adverse reactions.
199
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high
altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87. The use of these fuels could result
in engine damage that will not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as
other conditions, for example when towing
a trailer. See Towing (page 297).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle
and engine performance. For additional
information, refer to www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.
200
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in
the household refuse or the public sewage
system. Use an authorized waste disposal
facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 200).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
may not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
201
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
B
202
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
D
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds
before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
A
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep the fuel
pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler
pipe.
203
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B
when refueling. Holding the fuel pump
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
E206912
A B
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
E119081
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove
it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you have
filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close,
a message could appear in the information
display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel
filler funnel provided with your vehicle
into the fuel filler pipe. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 200). This action
should dislodge any debris that may be
preventing the fuel tank filler valve from
fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler
funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
204
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in the
advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The
empty reserve is an unspecified amount of
fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the
fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures
through the trip computer average fuel
function.
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the
break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
• Fully loading your vehicle.
• Carrying unnecessary weight.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 200).
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
205
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal floor.
Failure to follow these instructions may
result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. Similar
federal or provincial laws may apply in
Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle
modification without first determining
applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions control
systems including related sensors
or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system
can result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by any
person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive exhaust
smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
206
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic
conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter
that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct
the concern, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
preceding statements concerning prohibited
tampering acts and maintenance, and the
noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide,
are applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 328).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
207
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Lincoln,
Motorcraft or Lincoln-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Lincoln parts should be equivalent to
genuine Lincoln Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 202).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
208
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service.
See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
209
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property damage.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions of
your Automatic Transmission
E247220
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Press the desired gear on the
transmission selector.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Press the park (P) button on the
transmission selector.
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P). An audible tone
sounds once you select park (P).
When the ignition is turned off, your vehicle
automatically shift into park (P). If the ignition
is turned off when the vehicle is moving, it
first shifts into neutral (N) until the vehicle is
stopped and then shift into park (P)
automatically.
The electric parking brake may apply when
you shift to park (P) without the brake pedal
fully pressed. The electric parking brake
applies when you shift to park (P) on large
slopes. The electric parking brake releases
with the drive away release function or
manually as described in the Releasing the
Electric Parking Brake section. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 226).
210
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Transmission
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature does not operate when
your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or
neutral tow.
Your vehicle has a feature that automatically
shifts your vehicle into park (P) when any of
the following conditions occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver's door with your
seatbelt unlatched with the vehicle
stopped.
• You unlatch your seatbelt when the
driver's door is open with the vehicle
stopped.
If you turn your vehicle off when moving,
your vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) until
it stops and then shift into park (P)
automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period
of time, 2-15 minutes before starting your
vehicle, unlatching your seatbelt can cause
this feature to activate, even with the driver
door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your
door ajar indicator does not illuminate when
you open the driver’s door or the indicator
illuminates with the driver’ s door closed, see
your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your vehicle
moves backward. Always come to a
complete stop before shifting into and out
of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the selector in neutral (N), your vehicle
can be started and is free to roll. Hold the
brake pedal down when in this position.
Stay in Neutral Mode
Note: Stay in neutral mode is a temporary
vehicle state with the ignition off. Once in
this mode, sufficient battery voltage must be
maintained or your vehicle returns to park.
Extended usage of Stay in Neutral mode
may result in a battery voltage reduction to
a level where the vehicle may no longer
start. Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to
stay in neutral when you exit your vehicle.
Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this
mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
• Press the neutral (N) button on the
transmission selector.
• Press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
A message appears in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
To exit Stay in Neutral mode, apply the brake
and select a different gear.
Stay in Neutral Mode - No Start
Use this to move your transmission from the
park position in the event of a no start
situation. If your vehicle has a dead battery,
an external power source is required. Do not
tow your vehicle in this mode.
211
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Transmission
Note: This only functions if your 12-volt
battery has power and the starter can spin
the engine. If vehicle battery voltage is not
sufficient, an external 12-volt power source
such as jumper cables, battery charger or
jump pack may be required for this feature
to function.
Note: Once in this mode, sufficient battery
voltage must be maintained or your vehicle
returns to park.
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.
1. Do not press the brake pedal. Press the
START/STOP button.
2. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
Keep the brakes applied through step 7.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor
and hold through step 7.
4. Press the neutral (N) button on the
transmission selector.
5. Press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
6. Press and release the push to start
button, the transmission needs a
minimum of 2 seconds to exit park.
7. When neutral (N) is displayed, the brake
and accelerator pedals can be released.
To exit Stay in Neutral mode, select a
different gear.
A message appears in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through ten.
Adaptive Tow/Haul Mode
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.
Adaptive tow/haul has two modes, automatic
that is enabled by default and off.
To turn adaptive tow/haul off or on, use the
information display controls. See General
Information (page 120). The indicator light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Key adaptive tow/haul features:
• The system remains in the same mode,
even after a key cycle.
• Is only available in normal drive modes
(Normal 2H and Normal 4A).
The adaptive tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a trailer
or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges
are available when using adaptive tow/haul.
For information on towing. See Towing (page
297).
212
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Transmission
SelectShift™ Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission. The SelectShift
Automatic transmission gives you the ability
to change gears up or down, without a
clutch, as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low of an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift makes some downshifts for you,
it still allows you to downshift at any time as
long as the SelectShift determines that
damage to the engine does not occur from
over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing
the + paddle.
Pull the + paddle on the steering wheel to
activate SelectShift.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
SelectShift in drive (D):
Provides a temporary manual mode for
performing more demanding maneuvers
where extra control of gear selection is
required (for example, when towing, downhill
driving or overtaking). This mode holds a
selected gear for a temporary period of time
dependent on driver inputs (for example,
steering or accelerator pedal input).
In SelectShift mode, the instrument cluster
displays your currently selected gear. If you
request a gear, but it is not available due to
vehicle conditions, low speed, too high
engine speed for requested gear selection,
the current gear briefly flashes.
Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the
transmission downshifts for maximum
performance.
Note: In low traction conditions, you can pull
away in second gear using SelectShift. To
perform this operation, select drive (D) and
press the + paddle until 2 is displayed on the
cluster. Your vehicle is now ready to move
in 2nd gear.
213
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Transmission
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Note: This feature only functions if your
12-volt battery has power.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction.
1. Apply the parking brake and start the
engine before performing this procedure.
E252869
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access
slot. The slot is located below the CD
player, in your center console storage
bin. The access slot does not have a
label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the CD
player.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel flash when your
vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, press
the neutral (N) button to shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle can be shifted to the desired
gear and driven, if desired.
7. Release the parking brake.
214
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of
your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This
operation is considered normal and does not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
215
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle, see
General Information in the Wheels and Tires
chapter.
Note: Do not use SLIPPERY, DEEP
CONDITIONS or SLOW CLIMB on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so produces
excessive noise, increases tire wear and may
damage drive components. The 4X4 system
in these modes is only intended for
consistently slippery or loose surfaces.
Note: If you select a drive mode that uses
4L when your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system does not perform
a shift. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L for proper operation.
4X4 Indicator Lights
4X2
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when you
start the vehicle or when a drive
mode that uses 2H is selected.
4X4 AUTO
E181781
Continuously illuminates when a
drive mode that uses 4A is
selected.
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Continuously illuminates when a
drive mode that uses 4H is
selected.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Continuously illuminates when a
drive mode that uses 4L is
selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system typically remains in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It does not default to
4X2 in all circumstances. When this warning
is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by
an authorized dealer.
4X4 Modes
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
216
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: The AdvanceTrac® with RSC® stability
enhancement system can be switched off
by deselecting the feature in the cluster
menu. See Using Traction Control (page
231). This disables the engine management
feature, allowing the vehicle to maintain full
power and enhanced momentum through
the obstacle.
Note: The AdvanceTrac system can take
control of the transfer case clutch and
disable it during driving maneuvers when
necessary.
Your vehicle engages 4X4 modes based on
the currently selected Drive Mode. See
Drive Mode Control (page 284).
Note: The information display could show
messages during 4WD operation. See
Information Messages (page 125).
2H - 4X2
2H turns on when you select NORMAL or
CONSERVE. Power is delivered to the rear
wheels only. This mode is appropriate for
normal on-road driving on dry pavement and
provides the best fuel economy.
4A - 4X4 Auto
4A turns on when you select EXCITE,
NORMAL 4x4 AUTO or SLIPPERY. It
provides electronically controlled four-wheel
drive with power delivered to all four wheels,
as required, for increased traction. 4A is
calibrated in conjunction with Drive Mode.
4A in EXCITE is less aggressively tuned and
is appropriate for dry road surfaces. 4A in
NORMAL 4x4 AUTO is appropriate for all
on-road driving conditions, such as dry road
surfaces, wet pavement, light snow or gravel.
4A in SLIPPERY is more aggressively tuned
and is appropriate for slippery surfaces, such
as light snow or gravel.
4H - 4X4 High
4H turns on when you select DEEP
CONDITIONS. It provides electronically
locked four-wheel drive power to both the
front and rear wheels for use in off-road or
winter conditions such as deep snow, sand
or mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.
4L - 4X4 Low
4L turns on when you select SLOW CLIMB.
It provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear wheels
for use on low traction surfaces, but does so
with additional gearing for increased torque
multiplication. Intended only for off-road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L does not
engage when your vehicle is moving above
3 mph (5 km/h); this is normal and should be
no reason for concern.
Shifting Between 4WD System Modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal when a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement and
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
217
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Shifting To or From 4L - 4X4 LOW
Note: 4L mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a rolling speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the gearshift in neutral (N).
3. Rotate the drive mode knob to desired
mode.
The information display shows a message
indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. The
information display shows the system mode
selected. If any of the previous shift
conditions are not present, the shift does not
occur and the information display shows the
information guiding the driver through the
proper shifting procedures. If the previous
conditions are not satisfied in 30 seconds,
the system reverts back to the previous 4WD
mode or drive mode.
If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays in the
information display, transfer case gear tooth
blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward
gear, move the vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (2 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the
transfer case to complete the range shift.
Operating 4WD Vehicles With Spare
or Mismatched Tires
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire can affect the 4X4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of the spare tire and the remaining tires, you
may have limited four-wheel drive
functionality.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD
mode turned on.
• Turn on a 4WD mode unless the vehicle
is stationary.
• Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly may lead to impairment of the
following:
• Comfort and noise.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
218
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or damaging
underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times,
especially in rough terrain. Since sudden
changes in terrain can result in abrupt
steering wheel motion, make sure you grip
the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the area.
To maintain steering and braking control of
your vehicle, you must have all four wheels
on the ground and they must be rolling, not
sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive when
the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may have a front air dam.
Due to low ground clearance, you can
damage it when taking your vehicle off-road.
You can take the air dam off by removing
the bolts that secure it.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off
the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through
a transfer case. On four-wheel drive vehicles,
the transfer case allows you to utilize
different 4X4 modes when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures can be found in this
chapter and the Driving Aids chapter.
Information on transfer case maintenance
can be found in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar with
this information before you operate your
vehicle.
Four-wheel drive, when you select a
4X4-capable drive mode, it uses all four
wheels to power the vehicle. This increases
traction, enabling you to drive over terrain
and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
219
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Basic Operating Principles
• Do not use SLIPPERY, DEEP
CONDITIONS or SLOW CLIMB on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so produces
excessive noise, increases tire wear and
may damage drive components. The 4X4
system in these modes is only intended
for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice, proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply when
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the
road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than attempt
a sudden return to the road which could
cause your vehicle to slide sideways out of
control or roll over. Remember, your safety
and the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute, damage to the transmission and
tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle
(i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly
and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration
and braking. This could result in an increased
risk of vehicle roll over, loss of vehicle control
and personal injury. Use all available road
surface to bring your vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
220
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle goes from one type of surface
to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there
may be a change in the way your vehicle
responds to a maneuver (i.e. steering,
acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid excessive wheel slip.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck to
the point that assistance may be required
from another vehicle. Remember, you may
be able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal when moving slowly.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even 4X4 vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle
are submerged in water, their fluids should
be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
the axle lubricant should be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
221
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn around
because this could cause vehicle roll over.
It is better to reverse back to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power causes the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral. Disengage overdrive
or move the transmission selector lever to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose
control. The front wheels have to be turning
in order to steer your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the
brakes steadily. Do not pump the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end
of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide when driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
does not stop any faster as braking occurs
at all four wheels. Do not become
overconfident in any road condition.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Do not pump the brake pedal. See Hints on
Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 226).
222
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty. For this reason, we strongly
recommend that you do not make
modifications such as adding or removing
parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle to
roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect you and
your passenger's safety. We recommend you
frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis
components when your vehicle is subject to
off road usage.
223
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (IF
EQUIPPED)
The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (eLSD)
system directs torque, enabling the vehicle
to drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional axle cannot. The system is
active at all times and requires no input from
the driver.
Note: If your vehicle is not at optimal
operating conditions or a system fault is
present, a warning may be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Depending on the
warning, your vehicle may need to be
serviced. You can find more information
regarding the system information messages
in the Information Displays chapter. See
Information Messages (page 125).
Spare Tire
If your vehicle has an Electronic Limited Slip
Differential, do not use a spare tire of a
different size than the tire provided. If a spare
tire is installed, a message may appear,
indicating the system has disabled
automatically or reduced function to prevent
system overheat and damage. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired or
replaced road tire as soon as possible. When
the road tire is replaced, the system will
resume normal operation on the next key
cycle.
Trailer Towing
The Electronic Limited Slip Differential
enhances vehicle stability during trailer tow
operation. During high demand trailering
events, such as steep slopes, high speeds
or with a spare tire, the system may provide
a warning in the instrument cluster and
reduce function or enter a temporarily
disabled state. To resume normal function,
stop the vehicle in a safe location and allow
the unit to adequately cool. Once the system
has reached normal operating temperatures,
system function will be restored and the
Electronic Limited Slip Differential Restored
message will be displayed.
224
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 385).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 114).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Switch
the engine off, move the transmission to park
(P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the
accelerator pedal and the area around it for
any items or debris that may be obstructing
its movement.If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at which
you press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal. Emergency brake assist
can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you switch the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock
braking system may be disabled. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
the anti-lock brake system is disabled,
normal braking is still effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
225
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery is running out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console or
to the left-hand side of the steering wheel,
on the lower part of the instrument panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking Brake
E267156
Pull the switch upward.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not illuminate,
the system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Transmission (page 210).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake
when your vehicle is moving, except in an
emergency. If you repeatedly use the electric
parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
226
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Brakes
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold it.
E270480
The red warning lamp illuminates,
a tone sounds and the stoplamps
turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to slow
your vehicle down unless you release the
switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Push the switch downward.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the system
has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull away
in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in
a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the electric
parking brake has not released. Manually
release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
the Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 328).
227
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Brakes
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park
(P) for automatic transmission or first gear
for manual transmission.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the system will
be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The brakes release automatically when the
engine has sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the grade. This is
an advantage when pulling away on a slope,
for example from a car park ramp, traffic
lights or when reversing uphill into a parking
space.
The system will activate automatically on any
slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature off
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 120). The system
will remain on or off depending on how it
was last set.
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed
and select an uphill gear (for example,
drive (D) or first (1) when facing uphill or
reverse (R) when facing downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on
the slope without rolling away for about
two or three seconds. This hold time will
automatically be extended if you are in
the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display. See
General Information (page 120). The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
228
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Brakes
If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display, you
cannot turn the system on or off. When you
switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on.
AUTO HOLD
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn off
if a malfunction is apparent. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system uses your vehicle's brakes to
hold your vehicle at a standstill after you stop
your vehicle and release the brake pedal.
For example, Auto Hold can assist you while
stopping at traffic lights or while in traffic
jams by holding the brake pressure for you
once you bring your vehicle to a stop.
Make sure you switch the system off before
towing with your vehicle.
Note: In case of a malfunction in the system
while Auto Hold actively holds the vehicle
(for example, low power supply), a message
appears in the information display asking
you to press the brake pedal. If you see this
message, press the brake pedal
immediately.
Note: The system only activates if it
recognizes it is applying enough brake
pressure. On a steep hill or slope, make sure
you press the brake pedal sufficiently to
activate the system.
Note: In some cases, Auto Hold might hand
over to the parking brake. When the parking
brake applies, the red brake lamp appears.
This is normal. When you press the
accelerator pedal, the drive away release
feature releases the parking brake.
Note: Auto Hold works on all road grades.
E256165
Press the button to switch the system on and
off. The indicator light illuminates when you
switch the system on.
229
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Brakes
Note: You can only switch the system on if
you close the door and fasten your seatbelt.
Note: The system turns off every time you
power down your vehicle.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
Note: When in reverse (R), Auto Hold does
not function.
When the system is off, your vehicle behaves
the same as a vehicle without Auto Hold.
There is an indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster that has two modes, active and
unavailable:
E197933
The auto hold active indicator
illuminates in the information
display when the system holds
your vehicle stationary. When in active mode,
press the brake pedal and the Auto Hold
button to switch the system off.
E197934
The auto hold unavailable indicator
illuminates in the information
display when the system is on but
unavailable to hold your vehicle (for example,
during Active Park Assist, Stay in Neutral
Mode, or when you do not fasten your
seatbelt or close the door).
Note: Make sure you switch off Auto Hold
or use the Stay in Neutral mode before you
enter a car wash. See Automatic
Transmission (page 210).
Using Auto Hold
1. Use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a complete stop. The auto hold active
indicator illuminates in the information
display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
3. When you press the accelerator pedal,
the system releases the brakes and you
will be able to drive off. Once you drive
off, the auto hold active indicator no
longer illuminates in the information
display.
Note: The auto-start-stop system (if
equipped) may stop the engine when you
press the brake pedal. If this occurs, it
restarts once you press the accelerator
pedal. Auto Hold still holds your vehicle at
a standstill with the engine off.
230
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and traction
control light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure you
did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the stability
control and traction control light is still
illuminating steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch traction control on and off
through the information display controls. See
General Information (page 120).
When you switch the system off, a message
and an illuminated icon appear on the
instrument cluster.
Switch traction control on again to return the
system to normal operations.
Note: Your vehicle may have MyKey
restrictions regarding this feature. See
Principle of Operation (page 67).
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes:
• When a driving condition activates either
of the systems.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
231
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this could reduce the operator’s
ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system activates,
SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability control
or the traction control system, you may
experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction control
systems do not enhance your vehicle's
ability to maintain traction of the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the system applies higher
brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
232
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 231).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Stability Control and Traction Control
with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically activates when you
start your engine. When the transmission is
in reverse (R), they are disabled. You can
switch off the traction control portion of the
system independently. See Using Traction
Control (page 231).
233
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Traction control systemElectronic stability controlRoll stability controlStability control OFF lightButton functions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated during bulb
check
Default at start-up
234
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as ice
or extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of
vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control does
not provide hill hold at zero miles per hour
(0 kilometers per hour). When stopped,
you must apply the parking brake or place
the vehicle in P (Park), or it may roll away.
Hill descent control allows you to set and
maintain vehicle speed while descending
steep grades in various surface conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains armed,
but you cannot use the system to set or
maintain the descent speed.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down
interval after a period of sustained use. The
amount of time that the feature can remain
active before cooling varies with conditions.
The system provides a warning in the
message center and a tone sounds when
the system is about to disengage for cooling.
At this time, manually apply the brakes as
needed to maintain descent speed.
USING HILL DESCENT CONTROL
You can switch the hill descent
control on and off through the
information display.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the desired
speed. To decrease descent speed, press
the brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen vehicle
speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill Descent Modes
• At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h) and
20 mph (32 km/h): Your vehicle maintains
the speed you desire while in this mode.
• At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h): Your vehicle does
not maintain the speed you desire and
you cannot set your descent speed.
• At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h): You
need to switch this feature back on to
use.
Refer to the Information Display for additional
hill descent control messages. See
Information Messages (page 125).
235
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms. See your
authorized technician.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
is connected to prevent these warnings.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 67).
We recommend that you take some time to
get to know the system and its limitations by
reading this section.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system automatically turns on
each time you switch the ignition on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the radio
volume returns to the previous level.
E139213
You can turn the system on or off
by pressing the parking aid button.
If your vehicle does not have a
parking aid button, the system can be
switched off through the information display
menu or from the pop-up message that
appears once you shift the transmission into
reverse (R). See General Information (page
120).
236
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display
and does not allow you to switch the system
on. See Information Messages (page 125).
If a sensor is blocked and cannot function,
the system becomes disabled and a warning
message appears in the information display.
The system returns to a normal state once
the blockage is cleared.
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
237
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed out.
FRONT PARKING AID
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object, a
warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning tone
repeat rate increases. The warning tone
sounds continuously when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 120). If your vehicle has a
parking aid button, you can switch the
system off by pressing the button.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed out.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when your vehicle is moving and the
detected obstacle is moving towards your
vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the
audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds. Visual indication is always present
in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is located
238
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in (30 cm),
the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only when
your vehicle is moving at 5 mph (8 km/h) or
below and an obstacle is located inside the
detection area. Once your vehicle is
stationary, the visual indication will stop after
4 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles within the vehicle's driving path,
located near the sides of your vehicle. The
side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection
area without being detected and mapped
by the front or rear side sensors will not be
detected.
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close to
the side of your vehicle, an audible warning
sounds. As your vehicle moves closer to
obstacles within the driving path of your
vehicle, the rate of the audible warning
increases.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
239
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and obstacles
are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are
inside the driving path of your vehicle. When
you stop your vehicle the audible warning
stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains on
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in manual transmission,
the side sensing system provides audible
and visual distance warnings when your
vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) and obstacles are detected within
24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches
a standstill condition, the audible warning
stops after two seconds and visual indication
stops after four seconds.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system provides visual distance
indication only when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and there
is a front or rear parking aid obstacle
detected, and the side obstacle is within
24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the visual
distance indication stops after four seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks do not
appear.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control system
off.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven approximately
the length of your vehicle in order for the
system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is activated.
• The traction control system is activated.
• When the steering wheel angle
information is not available, the side
sensing system is not available. The
vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft
(150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to
recover the steering wheel angle
information.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
240
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
WARNING: Active park assist does
not apply the brakes under any
circumstances.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Active park assist is a multi-step process and
may require you to shift the transmission
multiple times. Follow the onscreen
instructions until the parking maneuver is
complete.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system by grabbing the steering
wheel, or by taking full control of your vehicle
after pressing the active park assist button.
Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any
loose items clear of the steering wheel when
using active park assist.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The sensors may falsely detect objects due
to ultrasonic interference caused by
motorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes or
horns, for example.
Note: If you change any tires, the system
must recalibrate and may not correctly
operate for a short time.
The system may not correctly operate in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire that is
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are incorrectly inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow, fog,
high humidity and high temperatures.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached an add-on accessory
close to the sensors on the front or rear
of your vehicle. For example, a bike rack
or trailer.
• You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
• The front bumper, rear bumper or the
side sensors are damaged.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.
241
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Using Active Park Assist
Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode
E146186
Press the button once to activate
parallel parking. Press the button
a second time to activate
perpendicular parking. If you press the
button again the system switches off.
If your vehicle is parked and after you switch
the ignition on, you can use the information
display to toggle through the modes. Press
the button to switch the system on and open
the system menu in the information display.
Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default
mode is parallel park out assist. However, if
you did not use active park assist to parallel
park your vehicle, use the information
display to select park out assist.
Note: You can repeatedly press the active
park assist button to toggle through the
modes only after moving your vehicle
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
To toggle through the modes, use the
buttons on the information display to select
the following:
• Parallel parking.
• Perpendicular parking.
• Parallel park out assist.
• Switch the system off.
Note: There is no time limit for toggling
through the modes.
Parallel Parking
The system detects available parallel parking
spaces and steers your vehicle into the
space. You control the accelerator, gearshift
and brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you into a parallel parking space.
E146186
Press the button once to search
for a parking space.
Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
active park assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator lever to search for a
parking space on the driver or passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E130107
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and parallel to the other parked vehicles
when searching for a parking space.
242
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from
other parked vehicles, the system may not
be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready to
park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
parking space it detects. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system
shows a message to instruct you to reduce
the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Parallel
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers
itself into the space. The system displays
instructions to move your vehicle backward
and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt
the maneuver, or the system switches off,
you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you
to stop your vehicle. The system may not
provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E130108
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and an information
message appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an
active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system off.
243
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates or
fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates or
fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Perpendicular Parking
The system detects available perpendicular
parking spaces and steers your vehicle into
the space. You control the accelerator,
gearshift and brakes. The system visually
and audibly guides you into a perpendicular
parking space.
E146186
Press the button twice to search
for a parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator lever to search for a
parking space on the driver or passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E186193
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and perpendicular to the other parked
vehicles when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from
other parked vehicles, the system may not
be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready to
park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the system
shows a message to instruct you to reduce
the vehicle speed.
244
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Automatically Steering into a Perpendicular
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers
itself into the space. The system displays
instructions to move your vehicle backward
and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt
the maneuver, or the system switches off,
you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you
to stop your vehicle. The system may not
provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E186191
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the active park assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and a message
appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an
active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates or
fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates or
fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
245
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Parallel Park Out Assist
The system steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly guides you out of a
parallel parking space.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
when exiting a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button once when your
vehicle is stationary in a parallel
parking space.
Note: If you did not use active park assist to
parallel park your vehicle, pressing the
button once selects parallel park. You must
use the information display to select park
out assist.
The system displays a message instructing
you to switch a direction indicator on. Use
the direction indicator to select which side
of your vehicle you want to exit the parking
space. The system displays instructions to
move your vehicle backward and forward in
the space.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you
to stop your vehicle. The system may not
provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E188012
After the system directs your vehicle to a
position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle. Generally, hand-over is when
your vehicle is still inside the parking space.
Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be
available when the clearance to the front or
the rear of your vehicle is too small.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt
the maneuver, or the system switches off,
you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
246
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Troubleshooting
Possible CauseSymptom
You may have switched the traction control off.The system does not search for a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors
can affect how the system functions.
The system does not offer a parking space.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking or greater than
19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After you reconnect the battery you
must drive your vehicle on a straight road for a short period of time.
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the current transmission position. For
example, rolling forward when in reverse (R).
The system does not correctly position your vehicle
in a parking space.
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from correctly aligning
your vehicle.
247
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size, or of different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changes after your vehicle passes
the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes. For example, driving from a
heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
248
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Use caution when turning
camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door, above the license plate.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
249
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object. For example, a
trailer.
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment door or liftgate is
open, no rear view camera features display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the
guidelines may disappear when you connect
the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
The rear view camera has a washer that
activates when you use the rear window
washer. See Rear Window Wiper and
Washers (page 95).
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 120).
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (If equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
250
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones will
highlight green, yellow and red when the
parking aid sensors detect an object in the
coverage area.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
251
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The default setting for the rear camera delay
is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
360 DEGREE CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The 360 degree camera
system still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the
windows, and checking the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Use caution when turning
camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
The 360 degree camera system consists of
front, side and rear cameras. The system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in front
or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of the
area outside your vehicle, including the
blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle to
you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.
Camera Views
E205884
The front camera enable button is
located near the display screen
and turns on the front camera
when your vehicle is not in reverse (R).
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only
images from the front cameras are displayed.
Press the camera button to display the front
camera image on the display screen.
When in reverse (R), only images from the
rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
into reverse (R), the rear view camera image
automatically shows on the display screen.
Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
E233726
Additional camera views may be
available for vehicles with specific
features. Press the small camera
icon shown on the top left corner of the
display screen to open the camera view
menu.
252
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The following camera views can be accessed
in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D) when you
press the camera button:
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the normal
front camera view next to a 360 degree
camera view.
• Front Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly in front of your vehicle.
• Front Split View: Provides an extended
view of what is in front of your vehicle.
The following camera views can be accessed
when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the normal
rear camera view next to a 360 degree
camera view. Press the zoom (+) button
to quickly access Rear Normal View from
this screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
• Rear Split View: Provides an extended
view of what is behind your vehicle.
Keep Out Zone
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING: The front camera system
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
E250813
The front video camera, located in the grille,
provides a video image of the area in front
of your vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while driving forward at low speeds.
To use the front video camera system, place
the transmission in any gear except reverse
(R). An image will display once the camera
enable button is pressed. The area displayed
on the screen may vary according to your
vehicle's orientation and/or road condition.
The front camera has a washer that activates
when you use the windshield washer. See
Windshield Washers (page 95).
Side Camera
E250816
253
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The side view camera, located in the outside
mirror, provides a video image of the area
on the sides of your vehicle as part of the
front 360 + normal view and rear 360 +
normal view. It aids you while parking your
vehicle either forward or backward.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
254
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The system
does not apply the brakes.
To help the system to maintain the set speed
when going downhill, downshift to a lower
gear.
Your vehicle speed could decrease below
the set speed when driving uphill.
Note: The system cancels if your vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
E262918
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. A more detailed graphic is in the
Steering Wheel information. See Cruise
Control (page 90).
Switching Cruise Control On
E265296
Press and release the button.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
information display.
Setting the Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release to set the
current speed.
Press and release to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to accelerate
or decelerate, respectively. Release the
button when you reach your preferred speed.
255
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach your preferred speed. Press either
button.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing only the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed you
previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press the button, or tap the brake
pedal to cancel the set speed.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press to resume the set speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E265297
Press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions when
using adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive
cruise control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections or
roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has aftermarket
electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
may not detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect pedestrians or objects in
the road.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
256
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
is not a crash warning or avoidance
system.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor which
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
E262918
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 90).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
E265296
Press and release the button.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
E255686
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release the button.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E255686
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
When Your Vehicle is Stationary
Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
E265299
Press while keeping the brake
pedal fully pressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph (30 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
257
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle,
your vehicle does not always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a crash without
driver intervention. Always apply the
brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
only warns of vehicles detected by the
radar sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle
graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small temporary
acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from
the vehicle in front. The system only applies
limited braking. You can override the system
by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system continues
to brake. A red warning bar displays on the
windshield and you must take immediate
action.
Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete
stop and remains stationary for less than
three seconds, your vehicle accelerates from
a stationary position to follow the vehicle
ahead.
E265299
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to
a complete stop and remains
stationary for more than three
seconds, press to follow the vehicle ahead.
Or press the accelerator pedal.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
E263697
Press and release to decrease the
gap distance.
E263696
Press and release to increase the
gap distance.
258
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
E255686
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and
therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
behavior
Distance GapGraphic
display,
bars indic-
ated
between
vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator pedal,
it does not automatically apply the brakes
to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
Use the accelerator pedal normally
to intentionally exceed the set
speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator light illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to change the
set speed in large increments. Release the
button when you reach your preferred speed.
259
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release the button or tap
the brake pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the previously
set speed and gap setting. The set speed
displays continuously in the information
display when the system is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
Automatic cancellation can also occur when:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and
cancellation occurs if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the
door after you stop the vehicle.
• You hold the vehicle at a stop
continuously for more than three minutes.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it
from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
E265297
Press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode, or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
260
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take
action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a clear
view of the road by the windshield-mounted
camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
261
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E253503
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function when something blocks the sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind
a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the
display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
262
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
ActionCause
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the
radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. A false blocked condition either self
clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control will
not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not respond
to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains
active to maintain set speed.
You can change from adaptive cruise control
to normal cruise control through the
information display. See General
Information (page 120).
263
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may
result in the system warning you even if
you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
264
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display. See General
Information (page 120). When activated, the
system monitors your alertness level based
upon your driving behavior in relation to the
lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning. When active the system
will run automatically in the background and
only issue a warning if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping your vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
265
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your lane
is likely to occur, the system notifies or
assists you to stay in your lane through the
steering system and information display. In
Alert mode, the system provides a warning
by vibrating the steering wheel. In Aid mode,
the system provides steering assistance by
gently counter steering your vehicle back
into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined Alert and Aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates the
steering wheel if the vehicle is still out of the
lane markings.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey™
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey™,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
E132099
Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.
266
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
System Settings
The system has optional menu settings
available. See General Information (page
120). The system stores the last known
selection for each of these settings. You do
not need to readjust your settings each time
you switch the system on.
Adjust the settings to enable one of the three
modes:
Alert Only
E165515
Alert Only — Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
Aid Only
E165516
Aid Only — Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
Alert and Aid Mode
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid — Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane, the system provides a steering wheel
vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
267
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the alert
and alert and aid modes. This setting does
not affect the aid mode.
• Low.
• Medium.
• High.
System Display
E272890
If you switch the system on in alert mode, a
graphic with lane markings appears in the
information display.
If you switch the system on in aid or alert and
aid mode, walls appear instead of lane
markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still
appear if you enable adaptive cruise control.
When the system is on, the color of the lane
markings change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side. This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog,
following a large vehicle that is blocking
or shadowing the lane or poor headlamp
illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
268
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
269
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
270
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. The blind spot information
system is not a replacement for careful
driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
E255695
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior
mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond
the rear bumper. The detection area extends
to approximately 59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear
bumper when the vehicle speed is greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following
occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
271
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following
occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an alert
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on
the side the approaching vehicle is coming
from. If you turn the direction indicator on for
that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator
flashes.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 125). The alert
indicators remain illuminated but the system
does not alert you.
Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
E225007
272
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle and trailer, extending rearward
from the exterior mirrors to the end of your
trailer.
The system turns on when all of the following
occur:
• You attach a trailer to your vehicle.
• You have set up the trailer to work with
the system through the information
display.
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Note: If you switch the Blind Spot Information
System off, the Blind Spot Information
System with Trailer Tow automatically turns
off.
Note: If you connect a trailer to your vehicle
and do not set up the trailer through the
information display, the system turns off and
a warning message appears. See
Information Messages (page 125).
Note: When towing a trailer, the extended
blind spot zone range decreases to a short
fixed or non-variable distance behind the
trailer. The extended blind spot zone range
returns to 59 ft (18 m) when the trailer is
disconnected.
Setting up a Trailer
E225008
Trailer lengthA
Trailer widthB
Trailer hitch ballC
You can set-up a trailer to work with the
system through the information display. See
General Information (page 120). When
setting up a trailer, a sequence of screens
appear asking for trailer information.
• Select type of trailer screen -
Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.
The system only supports conventional
trailers. If you select fifth wheel or
gooseneck, the system automatically turns
off.
• Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer
screen?
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)?
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Trailer width measurement:
The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the system
can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).
273
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement. You only need
to confirm that the width of the trailer is 8.5 ft
(2.6 m) or less.
• Trailer length measurement:
The trailer length is the distance between
the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the trailer.
The maximum length that the system can
support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
• Enter length of trailer:
The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m). Toggling
up or down using the menu buttons
increases or decreases the measurement by
3 ft (1 m). Select a length that is equal to or
within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured
length. For example, if the actual measured
length is 25 ft (7.6 m), toggle the length in
the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When you enter
the length of the trailer, the system setup is
saved.
Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
cargo rack with electrical lighting, enter a
length of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert remains
on for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or
less.
Note: Proper measurement and
measurement entry is required for the
system to function as designed.
System Operation
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the trailer set up menu appears in the
information display. This menu allows you to
set up a new trailer or choose from a
previously set up trailer. A warning message
appears and the system turns off if you do
not choose or add a new trailer.
Note: The warning message may not appear
until your vehicle speed reaches 22 mph
(35 km/h).
If you select a trailer in the information
display before connecting a trailer to your
vehicle, the system loads the configuration
for the selected trailer. When a trailer is
connected, a warning message appears.
Note: A second warning message may
appear stating that the Cross Traffic Alert
system has turned off. The Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
continues to function normally in this
situation.
Note: The system remembers the last
selected trailer set up when you start your
vehicle.
Trailer Considerations
The system is designed to work with a trailer
with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less, and
a total length from the trailer hitch ball to the
rear of the trailer of 33 ft (10.1 m) or less.
Some trailers may cause a slight change in
system performance:
• Large box trailers may cause false alerts
to occur when driving next to
infrastructures or near parked cars. A
false alert may also occur while making
a 90-degree turn.
• Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a total
length greater than 20 ft (6 m) may cause
delayed alerts when a vehicle is passing
at high speed.
274
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
• Box trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front may cause early
alerts when you pass a vehicle.
• Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with a
width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the
front may cause delayed alerts when a
vehicle traveling the same speed as your
vehicle merges lanes.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp
illuminates and a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 125).
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General Information
(page 120). When you switch the system off,
a warning lamp illuminates and a message
displays. When you switch the system on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved by
us, the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The cross
traffic alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
The system is designed to alert you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
you shift into reverse (R).
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that approach with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of reverse
(R).
275
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
276
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand
side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage
on that side is severely reduced.
277
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on
the side the approaching vehicle is coming
from. A tone sounds and a message appears
in the information display.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing in the distance.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when you
shift into reverse (R). See Information
Messages (page 125).
System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate when
any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are
obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds greater
than 37 mph (60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault a message
displays. See General Information (page
120).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off
using the information display. See General
Information (page 120). When you switch
system off, a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 125).
278
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system turns on each time you
switch the ignition on and you shift into
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the
system off, it turns on the next time you
switch the ignition on.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved by
us, the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Obtain immediate service from an
authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
279
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead to
a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during cold
and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice,
rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the
system. Keep the front camera and radar
free of snow and ice. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: In situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
280
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING: The system cannot help
prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at
speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
and pedestrian detection is active at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian
within your driving path, the system is
designed to provide three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
Alert: When active, a flashing visual warning
appears and an audible warning tone
sounds.
Brake Support: The system is designed to
help reduce the impact speed by preparing
the brakes for rapid braking. Brake support
does not automatically apply the brakes. If
you press the brake pedal, the system could
apply additional braking up to maximum
braking force, even if you lightly press the
brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may activate
if the system determines that a collision is
imminent. The system may help the driver
reduce impact damage or avoid the crash
completely.
Note: The Active Braking capability of the
system is disabled when you select the
SLOW CLIMB drive mode.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends using
the highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings.
Distance Indication and Alert
Distance Indication and Alert is a function
that provides you with a graphical indication
of the time gap to other preceding vehicles
traveling in the same direction. The Distance
Indication and Alert screen in the information
display shows one of the following graphics.
281
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E254797
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication appears.
Note: Distance Indication and Alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal62 mph (100 km/h)
0.6sec — 0.9sec56–82 ft (17–25 m)YellowNormal62 mph (100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal62 mph (100 km/h)
282
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the information display controls. See
General Information (page 120).
• You can adjust the Alert and Distance
Alert sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• You can switch the Distance Indication
and Alert function on or off.
• If required, you can switch Active Braking
on or off.
Note: Active braking automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
Blocked Sensors
E253503
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or
camera appears in the information display,
the radar signals or camera images are
obstructed. The radar sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the passenger
side of the lower grille. With an obstructed
radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does
not function and cannot detect a vehicle
ahead. With the front camera obstructed, the
Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond
to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the
system performance on moving vehicles
reduces. The following table lists possible
causes and actions for when this message
displays.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision
Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather
conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals.
283
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision
Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather
conditions improve.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor automatically recalibrates
successfully.
DRIVE MODE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Lincoln Drive Modes
Lincoln Drive Modes deliver a driving
experience through a suite of sophisticated
electronic vehicle systems. These systems
optimize steering, handling and powertrain
response. You can control performance
settings for multiple systems from this single
location.
284
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Changing the drive mode automatically
changes the functionality of the following
systems:
• Electronically power-assisted steering
system adjusts steering effort and feel
based on the mode you select. See
Steering (page 279).
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving. See Stability Control (page 232).
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
• Transmission controls optimize with shift
schedules tuned to each mode.
• Driveline settings optimize for each
mode.
Using the System
The system automatically tailors your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select.
E246604
To change the drive mode setting, use the
drive mode selector on the center console.
Note: Mode changes are not available when
the vehicle ignition is off or when the engine
is not running.
• NORMAL – For everyday driving. This
mode is a perfect balance of excitement,
comfort and convenience.
• EXCITE – For aggressive on-road driving.
This mode increases throttle response,
provides a sportier steering feel, along
with quicker shifting. The suspension
stiffens, with an emphasis on handling
and control. The transmission also holds
gears longer, helping your vehicle
accelerate faster when shifting gears.
• CONSERVE – Enables efficient and
responsible driving. It helps deliver
maximum fuel efficiency and increases
driving range.
• NORMAL 4A – For general on-road
driving. Use this mode on normal firm
surfaces such as dry or wet pavement
and hard packed dirt or gravel roads.
Delivers power to all four wheels, as
required.
285
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
• SLIPPERY – For less than ideal road
conditions, such as snow or ice covered
roads. Slippery mode inspires confidence
without taking away from driving
pleasure. Slippery mode lowers throttle
response and optimizes shifting for
slippery surfaces.
• DEEP CONDITIONS – Used for crossing
terrain that has deformable deep, rutted
surfaces such as mud, deep snow or
deep sand. Do not use on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
• SLOW CLIMB – Used when you need
extra power, such as when climbing
steep grades, going through deep sand
or pulling a boat out of a launch ramp.
Do not use on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system for proper
operation. Certain drive modes are not
available based on gear shifter position. If
a mode is unavailable due to a system fault
or change in gear shifter position, the mode
defaults to NORMAL.
286
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System
A storage area is located in the floor of the
rear cargo area. There are two types of
storage systems depending on your vehicle.
Short Wheel Base System
E250821
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges, which allows it to be put in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.
E250823
To close, lower the cover.
Long Wheel Base System
The long wheel base system has two
separate storage compartments. To access
these compartments, there is a bifolding
cover.
E250822
Lift up on the handle and fold back to open
the cover.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges, which allows it to be put in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.
E250824
E250825
To access the second storage compartment,
fold the cover back a second time.
To close, lower the cover.
287
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Advanced System: Forward Divider,
Cargo Shelf and Rear Barrier (Bulkhead
Position) (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not load any objects
on the shelf that may obstruct your vision
or strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING: Do not place people or
pets on or under the parcel shelf.
The board moves to the same positions for
both the short wheel base and long wheel
base advanced systems.
Advanced Short Wheel Base System
E250826
A storage compartment is located in the floor
of the rear cargo area. The cover operates
on friction hinges. Lift up on the handle to
open the cover. To close, lower the cover.
Advanced Long Wheel Base System
E250827
With the advanced long wheel base system,
there is an additional cover with an extra
storage compartment underneath. This cover
also operates on friction hinges. Lift up on
the handle to open the cover. To close, lower
the cover.
Forward Divider
E250828
To move the board into the divider position,
lift up on the handle and position the board
vertically at a 90° angle.
Note: The board operates on friction hinges,
which allows it to be put in any position
between a 0° and a 90° angle.
288
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Cargo Shelf
E250829
To move the board into the shelf position,
lift the board and move it to the horizontal
position. Once the board is horizontal, insert
the forward facing nubs into the hooks on
either side.
For the short wheel base system, it is
necessary for the second panel located
toward the front of the vehicle to be raised
up when the seats are folded down.
For the long wheel base system, it is
necessary for the second panel located
toward the front of the vehicle to be raised
up.
Note: Before moving the board into the shelf
position, you may need to flip down the
hooks.
Note: Do not put more than 50 lb (22 kg) on
shelf.
Rear Barrier (Bulkhead Position)
E250830
To move the board into the rear barrier or
bulkhead position, lift the board and move it
to the vertical position. Once the board is
vertical, insert the rearward facing nubs into
the hooks on either side.
Note: Before moving the board into the rear
barrier or bulkhead position, you may need
to flip down the hooks.
CARGO NETS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: This net is not designed
to restrain objects during a collision or
heavy braking.
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area.
E275127
1. Fold down the hooks on the top of the
rear quarter trim panel.
289
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
E275126
2. Attach the loop end of the net to the
upper hook. Use one prong on the hook
for the net attachment.
E275125
3. Attach the bottom of the net to the lower
anchor point.
E275124
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side
of your vehicle.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle differently
than unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars affixed
to the roof rack side rails. When using the
roof rack system, we recommend using our
genuine accessory crossbars designed
specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
290
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Maximum Recommended Load Amounts
Maximum Recommended LoadDescription
125 lb (56 kg)Vehicles with moonroof.
200 lb (90 kg)Vehicles without moonroof.
125 lb (56 kg)Vehicles equipped with 20 in (50 cm) wheels and without moonroof.
Note: The maximum recommended load is
based on the load being evenly distributed
on the crossbars.
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)
Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo. The
front crossbar is fixed. There are two
optional positions for the rear crossbar.
Follow the steps to reposition or remove the
rear crossbar.
E203063
1. Remove the crossbar bolts at both sides
of the rear crossbar by using the supplied
torx tool or a similar tool.
2. Move the crossbar to the new position.
3. Replace and tighten the bolts at both
sides of the crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
Note: There may be snap caps in the new
side rail position, which must be removed
before installing the crossbar. These caps
can be removed by using the supplied torx
tool or a similar tool.
291
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section guides you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both.
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within
its design rating capability, with or
without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before you
load your vehicle, become familiar with
the following terms for determining your
vehicle’s weight rating, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight of cargo
and passengers that your vehicle is
carrying. The maximum payload for your
vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading
label. The label is either on the B-pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada
may not have a tire and loading label.
Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for
maximum payload. The payload listed
on the Tire and Loading Information
label is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If
you install any additional equipment on
your vehicle, you must determine the
new payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire and Loading label. When towing,
trailer tongue weight or king pin weight
is also part of payload.
292
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity
(how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight
the vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum payload
of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space available.
Overloading or improperly loading
your vehicle can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight
that a single axle (front or rear) can carry.
These numbers are on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes
all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo. It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification label vehicle
weight limits can adversely affect the
performance and handling of your
vehicle, cause vehicle damage and
can result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the
highest possible weight of a fully loaded
trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
Towing Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the vehicle and the loaded trailer,
including all cargo and passengers, that
the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated for
293
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original
tires because they may lower your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can adversely
affect the performance and handling
of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage
and can result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury
or death.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
294
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
front or the rear gross axle weight rating
specified for your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
295
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading the
roof racks, we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as maintain
a low center of gravity. Loaded
vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
296
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit
of your vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Note: See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 309).
Your vehicle may have electrical items,
such as fuses or relays, related to
towing. See Fuses (page 341).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop and load capacity. When
both the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly angled
down toward your vehicle, when
viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in
another chapter of this manual. See
Load Limit (page 292).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
297
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER REVERSING AIDS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices.
Note: You must always be aware of the
vehicle and trailer combination and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or prevent
the vehicle or trailer from making contact
with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of the
vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly.
Incorrect measurements can result in the
improper function of the system up to and
including contact between the vehicle and
trailer.
Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Principle of Operation
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle
when reversing with a trailer attached. Turn
and hold the control knob in the direction
you want the trailer to go and the system
takes over the steering. This allows you to
focus on checking the mirrors and operating
the brake and accelerator.
298
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
You have to set up each trailer you use with
your vehicle. You must accurately follow the
setup process to make sure you correctly
place the sticker.
Contact your dealership if you need
assistance in setting up your trailer.
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist
Note: Once you enter a trailer's information,
the system stores it for easy recall. You can
add a maximum of 10 trailers to the system.
Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer
Hitch the conventional trailer to your vehicle.
See Essential Towing Checks (page 311).
Park your vehicle and trailer on a level
surface.
E247482
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. More information on selecting
your tow bar is available in the Towing
section. See Towing (page 297).
E247481
Make sure your vehicle and the trailer are in
line with each other. You can do this by
driving straight forward.
Step 2: Follow the Information Display
Prompts
Press the button to turn the system on.
E246984
1. Select the option to add a trailer in the
information display using the steering
wheel control. See General Information
(page 120).
299
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
2. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the down
arrow to scroll to the desired letter and
then press the toggle switch to advance
to the next letter. Press OK to continue.
3. Select the type of trailer brake system for
the trailer you are adding.
4. Select the brake effort level for the trailer.
Note: The default option is low. We
recommend this for most trailers. If the
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage,
or if you prefer more aggressive braking,
then select the other options as required.
Some examples of conventional type trailers
are below.
Note: You cannot use the system with the
types of trailers marked with the cross.
The system only works with conventional
trailers. It does not work with other types
including goose neck and fifth wheel.
E209766
Follow the information display prompts.
Step 3: Place the Sticker on the Trailer
Frame
You must place the supplied sticker in an
area visible by the rear view camera.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view cameras view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after you position
them. Do not re-use any stickers if removed.
Note: You can purchase additional stickers
through your authorized dealer.
E209805
300
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Use the supplied measurement card, a tape
measure and pen to carefully mark the area
where to attach the sticker (supplied in the
back cover pocket of your quick start guide).
Make sure the whole sticker is within the
zone between the two arcs or distance
markers on the diagram, and is also visible
in the rear view camera display.
Step 4: Take Measurements
After you correctly place the sticker on the
trailer, you must take some key
measurements.
Note: You must take accurate
measurements for the system to operate
properly.
Note: When rounding in inches, round
upward if the measured length is a quarter
inch or greater. Round downward if the
measured length is less than a quarter inch.
For example 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be
rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in
(30.8 cm) would be rounded down to 12.00 in
(30.48 cm).
Note: When rounding in centimeters, round
to the nearest whole centimeter. If the
measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm)
round downward. If the measurement is
more than or equal to 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round
upward. For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm) would
be rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm). 12.0 in
(30.5 cm) would be rounded up to 12.2 in
(31 cm).
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial units
as required by your country or vehicle.
Record the four key distances (A, B, C, D) as
required by the measurement card. Record
the trailer name for these measurements.
E247545
Distance A
The horizontal distance from the bumper to
the center of the ball hitch on the trailer.
Distance B
The horizontal distance from the center of
the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.
Distance C
The distance from the rear view camera to
the center of the sticker.
301
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Distance D
The horizontal distance from the bumper to
the center of the trailer axle (single axle
trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
with dual axles or more).
Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the
Information Display
Using the recorded measurements, enter the
required data into the system. Follow the on
screen prompts to enter each of the
measurements taken in step 4. When all four
distances have been entered, a confirmation
display will appear. Check the values are
correct before proceeding, or go back to
change any if required.
Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the sticker is identified by the system and
marked with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle is correctly located
over the sticker image in the display. The on
screen prompt will ask you to confirm this.
Note: If the system cannot locate the sticker
try cleaning the camera lens, and also make
sure the sticker is within the green zone as
indicated in step 3.
Calibrating the System
To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
24 mph (39 km/h) following the on screen
prompt.
Note: Check your measurements to make
sure you measured from the correct points.
Note: If you move the steering wheel during
this procedure, the calibration pauses.
Note: We recommend that you do not do
this at night.
A message will be displayed during
calibration and after calibration is complete.
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist
To use the system press the button and
select the required trailer from the display.
E246984
When the sticker is located, the display
prompts you to shift into reverse (R). The
system turns on.
302
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Note: The system does not function if your
hands are on the steering wheel. Remove
your hands to resume operation.
Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist control
knob instead. The knob acts as the steering
control for the trailer.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
E246992
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make the
trailer go left.
E246991
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the system
in a safe open area first.
Note: Try backing up in a straight line and
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the knob
results in a jerky movement of the vehicle.
E246993
Release the knob when the trailer is moving
in the direction you want. Control the
accelerator and brakes while the system
steers your vehicle automatically to keep the
trailer moving straight back.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.
Note: Your vehicle speed is automatically
limited.
Note: When you release the knob or turn it
to the center position, your vehicle follows
the trailer's path.
Troubleshooting
Note: The system requires a clear view of
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
the system to operate correctly.
303
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. However there are
some trailers that do not have a proper
surface and location to mount the sticker.
These trailers are not supported. Attempts
to place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement requirement
listed in Step 3 of the setup instruction or
entering inaccurate measurements to
proceed through setup can result in improper
system function.
Accurate measurements are critical to correct
system function. If you need to check
measurements entered or change them you
can access them through the trailer menus
in the instrument cluster. Choose the option
to change the sticker from the change trailer
settings menu. It is not necessary to remove
the sticker if you are just reviewing or
changing measurements.
The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve them
are listed below.
Note: If you still experience issues with the
system's ability to detect the sticker, see the
information in the next section regarding
sticker lost during system operation.
Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a bumper to hitch ball
center measurement of 4 in (10 cm) to
11 in (28 cm) when installed. Do not
attempt to use drawbars that have a
length outside this range as the system
performance will be degraded and could
cause improper system function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only from
bumper and the hitch ball center. A
straight line distance that includes any
vertical rise or drop will increase the
measurement and make it inaccurate.
Inaccurate measurements will degrade
system performance and could cause
improper system function. See step 4 of
the setup instruction to review
measurement instructions.
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instruction in step 3 of the setup has
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone will adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only from
center of sticker to the hitch ball center.
A straight line distance that includes any
vertical rise or drop will increase the
measurement and cause an inaccurate
value to be entered into the system. See
step 4 of the setup for additional
measurement instructions.
Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instructions in step 3 of the setup have
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone will adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function. If you have
met all the criteria for sticker placement
and you see this message this sticker is
304
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
either too far below or too close to the
camera to properly recognize the sticker.
In order for the system to operate
correctly the sticker height must be
lowered if you receive the minimum
warning or the sticker height must be
raised if you receive the maximum
warning.
• Only one sticker can be placed on the
trailer for correct system function. The
previous sticker must be removed or
covered so only one sticker is visible to
the camera.
• Measurement B and C must be measured
again if a new sticker is placed on the
trailer.
Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only from
the bumper to the center of the single
axle or the center of all the axles on the
trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
additional measurement instructions. The
TBA system does not support trailer
lengths outside the range allowed by the
information display.
System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the camera
image. Clean the camera and sticker if
necessary.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the sticker.
Inaccurate sticker measurements will
degrade the system’ s ability to locate the
sticker. Verify the measurements entered
into the system are accurate.
• Remove the incorrectly circled label or
decal if possible.
• If you cannot resolve the issue a new
sticker location should be tried. The
sticker location must still meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the setup
instructions. Only one sticker can be
placed on the trailer for correct system
function. The previous sticker must be
removed or covered so only one sticker
is visible to the camera.
Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer straight behind
your vehicle. Any steering input or trailer
movement will pause the calibration.
For best results:
• Use a long, straight, smooth and level
road when attempting to calibrate.
• Drive straight forward.
• Drive between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
24 mph (39 km/h).
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
305
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
The system is not available:
• The system relies on many sub-systems
in your vehicle to operate correctly. If
those sub-systems are not operating
correctly the system may not be
available.
• Low battery voltage is a condition which
will prevent the system from operating.
Please make sure the battery is correctly
charged if the system is not available.
• You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph (40 km/h)
before the system is available again.
• If the message still displays take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
Sticker lost:
• If the system cannot initially find the
sticker, it may be necessary for you to
change the lighting conditions by moving
the vehicle and trailer or waiting until
conditions change.
• Check for the following if you receive the
lost sticker message while using the
system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible and the
pattern is discernable in the rear view
camera image.
• Clean the sticker and camera to make
sure they are unobstructed.
• Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth
and water.
• Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing
alcohol sprayed directly onto the sticker,
and then wipe clean with a soft cloth.
• Remove any items that may be blocking
the view of the sticker. Depending on
your trailer configuration and any
equipment mounted to your trailer it is
possible for the sticker to be blocked
from view of the camera as it rotates on
the hitch ball but not be blocked during
setup. Remove the obstruction if
possible. It will be necessary to remove
the sticker from it’ s current location if the
obstruction cannot be cleared and place
a new sticker that will be visible to the
camera in all positions of the trailer
behind your vehicle.
• Placing the sticker on a surface angled
away from the vehicle reduces
performance. Use a drawbar that
positions the trailer level to the ground
when attached to vehicle. This typically
provides a level surface to mount the
sticker. Place the sticker on a bracket or
other object when no level surface is
available.
• Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat
surface that is completely visible to the
camera. Do not fold the sticker over an
edge on the trailer frame. This can
degrade performance.
• Shadows on the sticker may effect
tracking performance under some
lighting conditions. Moving the sticker to
another location within the allowed
placement area may improve
performance. Use the change sticker
option in your Towing menu if you move
the sticker.
306
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
• You can change your sticker location by
going into the Towing menu, selecting
trailer options, selecting change trailer
settings and then selecting the change
sticker option. The previous sticker must
be removed. ONLY ONE STICKER
SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER
FOR CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the sticker.
Inaccurate measurements will reduce the
system’s ability to locate the sticker.
Check the measurements entered into
the system are correct. Refer to the step
4 of Pro trailer backup Assist setup for
instructions on measurements.
• You can change your measurement by
going into the Towing menu, selecting
trailer options, selecting change trailer
setting and then selecting the change
sticker option. Disregard the prompt to
remove this sticker and continue to the
next step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System will not backup straight:
• Factors such as the drawbar connection
to the hitch receiver, road camber, road
grade and compliance in the trailer
suspension can influence how straight
the system is able to back your trailer
when the knob is not turned. You can
compensate for the trailer drifting to the
right or left by slowly turning the Pro
Trailer Backup Assist knob until the trailer
is following your desired path and then
holding the knob in that position. If you
would like to recalibrate the system for
straight backing, you can do so with the
following procedure.
• Go into the Towing menu, select trailer
options, select change trailer setting and
then select the change sticker option.
Your saved measurements will be
displayed. Do not change them but
continue to confirm measurements. Once
you confirm the measurements, the
system will then prompt you to perform
the calibration procedure.
System consistently shows Stop Now Max
trailer angle reached warning:
• The system uses your measurements to
determine sticker position and establish
system limits. Accurate sticker placement
and trailer measurements will provide the
best system performance. If you are
consistently receiving this warning it is
likely there is an issue with sticker
placement or the entered measurements.
Make sure that the sticker is placed
correctly based on steps 3 and the
measurements were made correctly
according to Step 4. The troubleshooting
guide for trailer measurements can also
be reviewed for help in making
measurements.
• To change sticker location or change
trailer measurements, go into the Towing
menu, select trailer options, select
change trailer setting and then select the
change sticker option.
307
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
• If the sticker location needs to be
changed, the previous sticker must be
removed and a new sticker needs to be
placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE
TRAILER FOR PROPER SYSTEM
FUNCTION.
• Disregard the prompt to remove this
sticker and continue to the next step if
you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System consistently shows Stop now take
control of steering warning:
• The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and you
must take over steering. There are four
reasons why this warning displays and
additional information regarding the
reason for the warning is available on the
center display.
• The steering wheel is touched while the
system is controlling it. Avoid touching
the wheel during system operation.
• The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Backup slowly.
• The sticker was lost by the camera
system. Once your vehicle is stopped
additional warnings will indicate the
sticker was lost. Refer to sticker lost
trouble shooting tips.
• An internal condition for system
operation was not met which requires
your vehicle return to manual control of
the steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection menu.
Using a different drawbar or a different pin
hole (on drawbars with more than one) when
connecting the drawbar to your vehicle
affects the trailer measurements. Take the
measurements again and update if required.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple times,
gradually reducing vehicle speed.
308
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED
appears in the information display. The first
thing to do is slow your vehicle down, then
pull safely to the side of the road and check
for proper tongue load and trailer load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page 287).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 36.5 feet² (3.39 meters²) if your
vehicle is equipped with the standard
towing package, or 60 feet² (5.57
meters²) if your vehicle is equipped with
the optional heavy duty package.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may
significantly reduce the performance of
your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer
with a low aerodynamic drag and
rounded front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided
the maximum trailer weight is less than
or equal to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle configuration on
the following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer
weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight
rating for your vehicle model and
axle ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that
apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as a
draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures
into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final
trailer tongue weight.
309
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not
sure.
Maximum Trailer WeightMaximum GCWRTowing PackageVehicle Type
6,200 lb (2,812 kg)12,500 lb (5,670 kg)
Standard
Short Wheel Base 4x2
6,200 lb (2,812 kg)12,700 lb (5,761 kg)Short Wheel Base 4x4
6,600 lb (2,994 kg)13,100 lb (5,942 kg)Long Wheel Base 4x2
6,600 lb (2,994 kg)13,300 lb (6,033 kg)Long Wheel Base 4x4
8,500 lb (3,855 kg)15,300 lb (6,940 kg)
Optional Heavy Duty with
50% Load Distributing
(FALR)
Short Wheel Base 4x2
8,300 lb (3,765 kg)15,300 lb (6,940 kg)Short Wheel Base 4x4
8,400 lb (3,810 kg)15,500 lb (7,031 kg)Long Wheel Base 4x2
8,200 lb (3,719 kg)15,500 lb (7,031 kg)Long Wheel Base 4x4
310
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See any instructions that come with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 547).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 292).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles
with a Trailer Towing Package and
7–Pin Connector)
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lamp.Yellow
Ground (-).White
Electric brakes.Blue
Right turn signal and stop lamp.Green
Battery (+).Orange
Running lights.Brown
Reverse lights.Grey
Trailer Hitch Cover
Your vehicle has a removable trailer hitch
cover. To remove the trailer hitch cover:
311
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
E268259
1. Grab the trailer hitch cover at the bottom
and pull towards the rear of the vehicle
until the bottom of the trailer hitch cover
unsnaps from the bumper.
2. Grab the trailer hitch cover at the edge
and rotate until the top of the trailer hitch
cover unsnaps from the bumper, then
remove the trailer hitch cover.
To install the trailer hitch cover:
E268260
1. Line up the snaps on the trailer hitch
cover to the holes on the bumper and
push forward until it snaps into place.
Hitches
WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld or
modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer
hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond
the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle
and could result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural damage,
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings
depending on mode of operation:
• Weight-carrying mode requires a draw
bar and hitch ball. The draw bar supports
all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight-distributing mode requires an
aftermarket weight-distributing system,
which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring
bars and snap-up brackets. This system
distributes the vertical tongue load of the
trailer between the truck and the trailer.
312
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Maximum Tongue WeightMaximum Trailer WeightMode
600 lb (272 kg)6,000 lb (2,722 kg)Weight carrying
900 lb (408 kg)9,000 lb (4,082 kg)Weight distributing
Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual
vehicle ratings are dependent on engine,
transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is
higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the height
of your vehicle's front wheel opening on
the fender is approximately half the way
down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose down
toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer hitch
as recommended by the manufacturer. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
313
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure the latch fully closes.
Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Use the integrated trailer
brake controller to properly adjust the
trailer brakes and check all connections
before towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes with
a proportional output based on the towing
vehicle’s brake pressure.
The controller user interface consists of the
following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing
these buttons adjusts the controller's power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
You can increase the gain setting to 10.0
(maximum trailer braking) or decrease it to
0 (no trailer braking). The gain setting
displays in the message center.
314
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
The controller shows gain setting, output bar
graph, and trailer connectivity status in the
information display. They appear in the
information display as follows:
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current gain
setting during a given ignition cycle and
when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with no
trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional, during
a given ignition cycle. It also displays if a
truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs causing
the trailer to appear disconnected. This
message can also display if you use the
manual control lever without a trailer
connected. After disconnecting the trailer
connector, press the brake pedal for
approximately five seconds to allow the
system to detect and update the trailer
status.
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's electric
brakes independent of the tow vehicle's. See
the following Procedure for adjusting gain
section for instructions on proper use of this
feature. If you use the manual control while
the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the
trailer brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop lamp,
if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20–25 mph (32–40 km/h).
315
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer wheels
may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a message
confirming connection appears in the
information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons
to increase or decrease the gain setting
to the desired starting point. A gain
setting of 6.0 is a good starting point for
heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20–25 mph (32–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by
squealing tires, reduce the gain setting.
If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase
the gain setting. Repeat Steps 5 and 6
until the gain setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a
heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up may
not be attainable even with the maximum
gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display Warning
Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your warranty does not cover this
diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
A message indicating a trailer brake module
fault may display in response to faults sensed
by the trailer brake controller, accompanied
by a single tone. If this message appears,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair. The
controller may still function, but performance
may be degraded.
A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire. If this message
displays, accompanied by a single tone, with
no trailer connected, the problem is with your
vehicle wiring between the trailer brake
controller and the 7-pin connector at the
bumper. If the message only displays with a
trailer connected, the problem is with the
trailer wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may
be drawing too much current.
316
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as application
during trailer sway, could cause instability
of trailer or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of the
trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock up
on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work independently
of each other. Changing the gain setting
on the controller does not affect the
operation of your vehicle's brakes
whether you attach a trailer or not.
• When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed item.
Lincoln is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to
misuse or customer installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring;
this may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
317
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control when carrying
heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically when
you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission has a Grade Assist
or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature
when towing. This provides engine
braking and helps eliminate excessive
transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle has AdvanceTrac with
RSC, this system may turn on during
typical cornering maneuvers with a
heavily loaded trailer. This is normal.
Turning the corner at a slower speed
while towing may reduce this tendency.
• If your vehicle has Adaptive suspension,
you can select NORMAL or SPORT drive
control modes for better experience
when towing a trailer. See Information
Displays (page 120).
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the gross
combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear
lubricant (if the axle is not already filled
with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 418).
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in the front and back
of the trailer wheels.
Note: Chocks are not included with your
vehicle.
318
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
temporary spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type (All-Season
or All-Terrain) or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations
when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or other
axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 152).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are designed to prevent damage
to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehicle
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. You must
tow your vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground, for example when using a
car-hauling trailer.
319
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Without 4x4
LOW
If your vehicle does not have 4x4 Low, you
cannot tow your vehicle with any wheels on
the ground or vehicle damage may occur.
You must tow your vehicle with all four
wheels off the ground, for example when
using a car-hauling trailer.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles With 4x4 LOW
You can only tow a vehicle with 4X4 LOW
with all wheels on the ground by placing the
transfer case in its neutral position and
engaging the four wheel down towing
feature. Perform the steps outlined in the
following section after positioning your
vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly
securing them together.
Four-wheel-down Towing
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow
with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
information display, you must perform the
procedure again from the beginning.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
1. Start your vehicle.
2. Confirm that your vehicle is in NORMAL
mode. See Drive Mode Control (page
284).
3. Place your vehicle in stay in neutral
mode. See Automatic Transmission
(page 210).
4. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
engine START/STOP button once. A
Transmission Not in Park message
appears in the information display.
5. Place your vehicle in accessory mode by
pressing the start button once without
pressing the brake pedal.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Enable neutral tow through the
information display by selecting Settings
from the menu. See General Information
(page 120).
8. Then select Advanced Settings.
9. Then select Vehicle.
10. Then select Neutral Tow.
11. Press and hold the OK button until the
information display states Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in
Neutral.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow
with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
information display, you must perform the
procedure again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into neutral, this is
normal.
12. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and switch the ignition off by pressing
the engine START/STOP button once
without pressing the brake pedal. You
do not need to leave your keys in the
vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
vehicle as you normally do.
320
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
battery during recreational towing. It
prevents the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer case
to its neutral position for recreational
towing may cause the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in park (P). It may
injure the driver and others. Make sure you
press the foot brake and the vehicle is in
a secure, safe position when you shift to
neutral (N).
Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position can damage vehicle
components.
Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver's door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position. A message
appears in the information display confirming
your vehicle is in neutral tow.
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, press the brake pedal
and start the engine.
2. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
engine START/STOP button once.
3. Place your vehicle in accessory mode by
pressing the start button once without
pressing the brake pedal.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Place the transmission back into park (P).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral position,
this is normal.
Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays
in the instrument cluster, transfer case gear
tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions following this section.
7. Apply the parking brake, then disconnect
your vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift the transmission into
drive (D) to make sure the transfer case
is out of the neutral tow position.
9. If the transfer case does not successfully
shift out of neutral (N), set the parking
brake until you can have your vehicle
serviced.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull Forward
or To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N Message
If the instrument cluster displays these
messages, perform the following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N), then
start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission into drive (D) and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m). You
may hear an audible noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This
is normal.
321
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
4. Make sure the instrument cluster displays
Neutral Tow Disabled.
322
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this
time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and
change up through the gears early. Do not
labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
WARNING: If you continue to drive
your vehicle when the engine is
overheating, the engine could stop without
warning. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position, the
engine is overheating. See Gauges (page
113).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. The
engine continues to operate with limited
power for a short period of time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
cooling fan operates continually.
1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 364).
5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
323
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Hints
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move
freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
324
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Hints
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and press
down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make
sure they are secure.
325
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi (110,000 km)
(whichever comes first) for subsequent
owners.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of
diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (160 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client is
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (160 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle
is operational but the trailer is not, then
the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-521-4140.
326
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (160 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States clients, call
1-800-521-4140. Clients need to submit their
original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company of Canada,
Limited offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is eligible
within Canada or the continental United
States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333, or visit our
website at www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the
ignition is in any position, or if the key is not
in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery loses charge. As a result,
there may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your hazard
flashers when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and
rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel
to the engine in the event of a moderate to
severe crash. Not every impact causes a
shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
327
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP
to switch on your vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by
pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Note: To avoid reverse polarity connections,
make sure that you correctly identify the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both
the disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables. Stay clear of moving
parts.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not use fuel lines,
engine valve covers, windshield wiper
arms, the intake manifold, or hood latch as
ground points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end
of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.
328
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located
above the positive (+) terminal of your
vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
E274083
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
329
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
E282456
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled in
specific markets.
330
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure. If
you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by any
other means, vehicle damage may occur.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment.
We recommend towing a rear-wheel drive
vehicle with the rear wheels on a tow dolly
when towing your vehicle from the front
using wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
We recommend towing a rear-wheel drive
vehicle with the front wheels on a tow dolly
when towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the front fascia.
TOWING POINTS
WARNING: Switch the ignition off
before removing the recovery hook. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
WARNING: The recovery hook can
become hot. Let the recovery hook cool
down before removing it. Failure to do so
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle comes with frame-mounted
front recovery hooks. These hooks should
never have a load applied to them greater
than the gross vehicle weight rating of your
vehicle.
331
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
E276543
Remove the covers to access the front
recovery hooks.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are secure
and capable of withstanding the applied
load.
• Do not use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to three
times the gross vehicle weight of the
stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet draped
over the recovery strap to help absorb
the energy in the event the strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle does not
have a load heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line, within 10
degrees.
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the
length of the recovery strap. This helps
avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery
hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle
lurching into their path.
332
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
333
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
334
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first
18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
335
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
336
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel
or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur
fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact our
Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using improper fuels may also result in
difficulty importing your vehicle back into the
United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or
Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean,
and Israel and the Middle East, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact the
corresponding Ford Customer Assistance
Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
337
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relationship Center
[email protected]N/AN/AAsia Pacific
[email protected]-+1 313 594 4857Caribbean and Central America
[email protected]971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users
in Saudi
800850078
[email protected]N/AN/ANorth Africa
[email protected]N/A+1-800-841-3673Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands
[email protected]N/A+1-313-594-4857Sub-Saharan Africa
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
338
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Global
Trade Services by emailing,
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
339
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-automobiles.html (French)Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
340
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
Some features need to be reset when you
or someone else disconnects and reconnects
the battery. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 371).
341
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
E251921
342
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
Horn.
25A
1
1
Fan 1.
50A
2
2
Front wiper motor.
30A
2
3
Not used.—4
Starter relay.
30A
2
5
Power point #1.
20A
2
6
Power point #2.
20A
2
8
Rain sensor.
5A
1
10
Not used.—12
4X4 module.
10A
1
13
Heated backlite.
Heated mirror relay coil.
Heated wiper park relay coil.
Transmission isolation relay coil.
Transmission coil module.
15A
1
14
343
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
RH-LDM, LH-LDM.
15A
1
15
Voltage quality module.
Blindspot information system.
Cruise control module.
Tailgate applique.
Image processing module B.
Powertrain control module (PCM) run/start feed.
10A
1
16
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) run/start feed.
10A
1
17
Electronic power assist steering, run/start feed.
10A
1
18
Not used.—19
Front blower.
40A
2
20
Passenger seat motors.
40A
2
21
Not used.—22
Alternator A-line.
10A
1
23
Trailer brake control module.
30A
2
24
Body control module power 1.
50A
2
25
344
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
Electronic fan 3.
50A
2
26
Driver seat motors.
40A
2
27
Rear heated seats.
15A
1
28
4x4 integrated wheel end solenoid.
10A
1
29
Trailer tow class II-IV battery charge.
25A
2
30
Power folding seat module.
50A
2
31
A/C clutch.
10A
1
32
Not used.—33
Not used.—34
Vehicle power 4.
20A
1
35
Vehicle power 3.
10A
1
36
Vehicle power 2.
25A
1
37
Vehicle power 1.
25A
1
38
345
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
Not used.—39
Inverter.
50A
2
41
Trailer tow light module class II-IV.
20A
2
43
Front/rear washer pump.
20A
2
45
Family entertainment system.
7.5A
1
46
Not used.—47
Not used.—48
Not used.—49
Fuel pump.
30A
2
50
Power point #3.
20A
2
51
Body control module (BCM) voltage quality monitor (VQM).
50A
2
52
Trailer tow park lamps relay.
25A
2
53
Electronic limited slip differential (ELSD) relay.
40A
2
54
346
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
Auxiliary blower.
40A
2
55
Power point #4.
20A
2
56
Front driver and passenger seats - belt tension reducer
5A
1
58
Not used.—59
Lincoln start lamp
5A
1
60
Right-hand enhanced exterior lighting (EEL) module (R64).
25A
1
61
Left-hand enhanced exterior lighting (EEL) module (R64)
25A
1
62
4X4 module.
25A
1
63
Not used.—64
Not used.—65
Not used.—66
Not used.—67
Not used.—69
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) / park brake module.
40A
2
70
347
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
4X4 module
25A
2
71
Not used.—72
Not used.—73
Trailer tow backup lamps.
10A
1
74
Not used.—75
Body control module (BCM) run power 2.
50A
2
76
Climate control (heated/vented) seat module.
30A
2
77
Not used.—78
Not used.—79
Heated wiper park.
10A
1
80
Not used.—81
Not used.—82
Transmission control module (TCM) power.
15A
1
83
Not used.—84
348
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
Not used.—85
USB smart charger #5.
5A
1
86
USB smart charger #3.
5A
1
87
Multi contour seats relay.
10A
1
88
Power running boards.
40A
2
89
Power liftgate module.
30A
2
91
Heated mirrors.
15A
1
93
USB smart charger #1.
5A
1
94
USB smart charger #2.
10A
1
95
Rear wiper motor relay
30A
2
96
Intercooler puller fan relay.
40A
2
97
Transmission oil pump.
15A
2
98
349
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse Number
Heated backlight.
40A
2
99
Power point #5.
20A
2
100
Electric fan 2.
25A
2
101
Not used.—102
Not used.—103
Not used.—104
Not used.—105
1
Micro 2 fuse.
2
Slotted M case fuse.
Protected ComponentRelay
Powertrain control module.R02
Electric fan 2.R05
350
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the right-hand side
of the instrument panel.
E205347
To remove the trim panel for access to the
fuse box, pull the panel toward you and
swing it out away from the side and remove
it. To reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it shut.
351
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
E145984
The fuses are coded as follows:
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.—1
Driver seat switch.
7.5A
1
2
Driver door unlock.
20A
1
3
352
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Trailer brake controller (TBM).
5A
1
4
Revel II amplifier.
20A
1
5
Not used (spare).
10A
2
6
Not used (spare).
10A
2
7
Not used (spare).
10A
2
8
Rear seat entertainment module (RSEM).
10A
2
9
Automatic heads up display.
Wireless accessory charger module (WACM).
5A
2
10
Hands free liftgate module.
Power liftgate module Logic (PLGM).
Combined sensor module (CSM).
5A
2
11
Keypad.
Cluster.
7.5A
2
12
Smart datalink connector Logic (SDLC).
Electronic control panel (ECP).
Steering column control module (SCCM) (Logic).
7.5A
2
13
Gear shift module (GSM).
353
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Extended power mode module (EPM).
10A
2
14
Brake Switch.
Smart datalink connector Power (SDLC).
10A
2
15
Liftglass release relay.
15A
1
16
Telematics control unit - modem.
5A
2
17
Push-button start switch.
5A
2
18
Not used (spare).
7.5A
2
19
Headlamp control module (HCM).
7.5A
2
20
In-car temperature and humidity sensor.
5A
2
21
Electrochromic (EC)mirror.
5A
2
22
2nd row heated seat module.
Moonroof (logic).
10A
1
23
Inverter (LIN logic).
Power window switch.
Power mirror switch.
DVD player (if equipped).
354
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Central lock relay.
20A
1
24
Central unlock relay.
Left front door zone module (DZM).
30A
1
25
Right front door zone module (DZM).
30A
1
26
Moonroof - Tilt, Vent. Slide.
30A
1
27
Revel II Amp.
20A
1
28
Left rear door zone module (DZM).
30A
1
29
Right rear door zone module (DZM).
30A
1
30
Adjustable column and pedal memory module (CAPM).
15A
1
31
Accessory protocol interface module (APIM) (Media Gateway
Module or SYNC).
10A
1
32
Drive mode switch module (DMSM) (if equipped).
Radio frequency transceiver module (RTM).
Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) control.
Audio control module (ACM).
20A
1
33
Rear audio control module (RACM).
Remote CD mechanism (if equipped).
355
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Run/start relay.
30A
1
34
Extended power mode module (EPM).
5A
1
35
Image processing module A (IPMA).
15A
1
36
Automated Park Assist Module
Continuous control damping module (CCD Module).
Heated steering wheel.
20A
1
37
Left rear power window.30A Circuit Breaker38
Right rear power window.
1
Micro 2 fuse.
2
Micro 3 fuse
356
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher
amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
357
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
358
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
E250815
359
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and locate
the secondary release lever under the
front of the hood in the center. Release
the hood latch by pulling the secondary
release upward.
E250814
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make sure
that it is closed properly and fully latched.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
360
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
E258054
361
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Windshield washer fluid reservoir.
See Washer Fluid Check (page
371).
A.
Power distribution box. See
Changing a Fuse (page 357).
B.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 371).
C.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 362).
D.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 362).
E.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 370).
F.
Air filter. See Changing the Engine
Air Filter (page 376).
G.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 364).
H.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
Checking the engine oil level too soon
after you switch the engine off may result
in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 359).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood
Overview (page 360).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again
to check the oil level. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 362).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If the
oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil
immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 422).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
362
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 360). Turn
it counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 422). You may have
to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
363
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at the
intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 547).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
364
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C).
Coolant concentration should be checked
using a refractometer. We do not recommend
the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips
for measuring coolant concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
reservoir or windshield washer fluid in the
engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification in order
to avoid plugging the small passageways in
the engine cooling system. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 418). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 418).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the
correct specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 418).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach
the correct level.
365
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. Operating an
engine with a low level of coolant can result
in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process is
not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection.
Coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the coolant and may
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the coolant
and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
366
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the
scheduled maintenance information, the
coolant should be changed. Add prediluted
coolant approved to the correct specification.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
418).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient temperature,
vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates,
however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
367
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine may
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend that
you contact your roadside assistance
service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long or
steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power in order
to manage the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on vehicle loading, grade and
ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is
no need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically turn
on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant temperature
decreases to the normal operating
temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully
into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine soon
messages appear in your information display,
do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift
into park (P) or neutral (N).
368
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature does
not drop, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the
engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 547).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK (IF
EQUIPPED)
E170444
3
369
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
1. Clean the area around the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.20 in (5 mm) from the
bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler opening. Fill
to the bottom of the opening.
Use only fluid that meets our specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
418).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other
than the recommended brake fluid as this
will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: A fluid level between the
MAX and MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to
add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
418).
370
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 418).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands after
handling.
371
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery does
not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,
make sure you reinstall the battery cover or
shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer, some
control conditions are maintained by power
from the battery. When the battery is
disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim
strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV)
must also relearn the ethanol content of the
fuel for optimum driveability and
performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 105). Reset
the radio station presets. See Audio
System (page 432).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
372
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the negative
battery cable to maintain battery charge for
quick starting.
Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery drain
is detected, the system temporarily disables
some electrical systems to protect the
battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. These messages are only
for notification that an action is taking place,
and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
373
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass.
E205141
2
3
4
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
3. Press the wiper blade secondary locking
clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, contact an
authorized dealer to check and realign your
headlamps.
374
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a dimple at
the center of the outboard projector lens)
to the ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On the
wall or screen you will observe a light
pattern with a distinct horizontal edge
toward the right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, you will need
to adjust the beam so the edge is at the
same height as the horizontal reference
line.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver
to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
375
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.
Let the bulb cool down before removing
it. Failure to do so could result in personal
injury.
Note: Vehicles with LED headlamps do not
contain serviceable bulbs. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
LED Lamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
Contact an authorized dealer.
The following lamps are LED:
• Headlamp Low/high.
• Front parking lamps.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Front direction indicators.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Reversing lamps.
• License plate lamps.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 419).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
547).
E248801
1. Release the two clamps that secure the
cover to the air filter housing. Push the
air filter cover toward the front of the
vehicle and up slightly to release it.
376
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
2. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
3. Install the new air filter element.
E248800
4. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not to
crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing and cover and
ensure that you properly align the tabs
on the edge into the slots.
377
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
378
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they
are dry.
379
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent cosmetic
damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle
using water. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from under
the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel
and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
380
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
381
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
384).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft® Spot
and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately, but do not oversaturate or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
382
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
383
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
384).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
384
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use an
approved wheel cleaner if available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you use
an approved bug and tar remover if
available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This reduces
the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake
pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
385
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
386
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of your
vehicle and the ground is less than that of
other models. Drive with extreme care to
avoid damage to your vehicle.
387
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the tires from
that fitted at the factory, the speedometer
may not display the correct speed. If you
intend to change the size of the wheels from
that fitted by the manufacturer, you can
check the suitability with an authorized
dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 390).
You can find the recommended tire inflation
pressures can on the Tire Label, which is on
the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door.
You can also find this information on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label, affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door
latch post; next to the driver seating position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least once
per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
388
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all four
wheels to power itself. This increases traction
which may enable you to safely drive over
terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through
a transfer case or power transfer unit.
Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select
different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel Drive
(page 216). For information on transfer case
maintenance, See Maintenance (page 359).
You should become thoroughly familiar with
this information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the initial
shift from two-wheel to four-wheel drive
when the vehicle is moving can cause a
momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not cause
for concern.
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there is
a significant difference between the size of
a spare and the remaining tires, four-wheel
drive functionality may be limited. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 216).
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
389
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often have a higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give you
the following information about tire
grades exactly as the government has
written it.
390
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (1 ½) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
391
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-Metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) and for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
392
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
393
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number:
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
394
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label located
on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's
door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the
vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
395
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single; defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below:
396
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 287).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by us.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. We recommend the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire pressure
gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire cracking,
tread separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation
increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
397
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
and internal damage to the tire. It also
may result in unnecessary tire stress,
irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the our
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
Our recommended tire inflation pressure
is found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label located
on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's
door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to
change the ride characteristics of the
vehicle. If you do not maintain the
inflation pressure at the levels specified
by us, your vehicle may experience a
condition known as shimmy. Shimmy is
a severe vibration and oscillation in the
steering wheel after the vehicle travels
over a bump or dip in the road that does
not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may
result from significant under-inflation of
the tires, improper tires (load range, size,
or type), or vehicle modifications such
as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should slowly
reduce speed by either lifting off the
accelerator pedal or lightly applying the
brakes. The shimmy will cease as the
vehicle speed decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning
they are not hot from driving even a
mile.
398
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example, driven
more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never
bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge
onto the valve and measure the
pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the
tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
399
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires
must be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear
bars, which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to one sixteenth of an inch
(2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade over
time depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
WARNING: In general, tires
should be replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear. However,
heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
WARNING: You should replace
your spare tire when you replace the
road tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been used.
400
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those
originally provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size may
be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver's door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If
the beads do not seat at the maximum
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
WARNING: When inflating the
tire for mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire sidewall,
the following precautions must be
taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
401
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
• Use both eye and ear protection.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure,
a Ford dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate steel
carcass tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from
the wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a pair,
except if the vehicle is equipped with
four wheel drive. Vehicles equipped with
four wheel drive should have all four
tires replaced simultaneously. Unevenly
worn tires, mismatched makes, models
or brands can be different in size,
resulting in potential damage to the four
wheel drive system.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels are not designed to be used
in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by us may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck
in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can
tear the tire and cause an explosion.
A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a passenger
or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
402
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re driving, the
wheels may be out of alignment. Have
an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension
may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the front
and rear tires and the vehicle has a
tire pressure monitoring system, then
you need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always perform
the system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the system,
it may not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
403
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
it is intended for temporary use only and
should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at
left of diagram)
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index and speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended
tires and wheels can cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch
post or the door edge that meets the door
latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
404
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an accessory
or equivalent. Other conventional link
type chains may contact and cause
damage to the vehicle's wheel house
and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires as
this may interfere with suspension
components.
• Only certain snow cables or chains have
been approved by Ford/Lincoln as safe
for use on your vehicle with the following
tires: 265/70R17 and 275/65R18.
• You should install snow cables or chains
that have been rated as SAE Class S.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the
chains do not touch any wiring, brake
lines, or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) or less
if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does not
work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no
longer needed. Do not use tire chains on
dry roads.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
405
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
406
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
When Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E250820
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 120). The low
tire pressure warning light will turn on if the
tire pressure is significantly low. Once the
light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’ s recommended tire pressure.
Even if the light turns on and a short time
later turns off, your tire pressure still needs
to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
407
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
408
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflated
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
Flashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
409
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) from a
cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease
about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)
in ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or
more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where air can
be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
not function.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the system
sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 405). Replace the spare tire
with a road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.
410
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels.
Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
• Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
stationary.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
swivel wrench and lug wrench are in the
following locations:
411
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumperSpare tire
Under the access panel located in the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
Jack and tool kit bag
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
WARNING: When one of the front
wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel, place
an appropriate block or wheel chock on
the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change
a tire on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
412
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
WARNING: Only use the spare wheel
carrier to stow the wheel provided with
your vehicle. Other wheel sizes could
cause the spare wheel carrier to fail if it
does not fit securely or is too heavy.
E175447
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level ground and
activate the hazard flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, place the
transmission in park (P) and switch the
ignition off.
3. Block the wheels diagonally opposite the
flat tire, for example, if the left front tire
is flat, block the right rear wheel.
Removing the Jack and Tools
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the jack and tool kit bag, because it needs
to be reinstalled after changing the tire.
1. Open the liftgate and lift the load floor
behind the third row seat. If your vehicle
has an access panel, you need to then
unlatch and remove this panel.
2. Remove the wing nut by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the jack and tool kit bag from
the bracket, loosen the straps and
remove the tool bag from the jack.
E252435
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the swivel wrench from the tool
kit bag, open the spare tire winch access
plug at the bottom of the compartment
for the jack and tools tray.
413
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
2. Insert the swivel wrench through the
access hole in the floor to engage the
winch. Turn the handle counterclockwise
until the tire lowers to the ground and
the cable is slightly slack.
E273399
3. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.
Note: If your wheel nuts are hidden, the
wheel cover or ornament must be removed
using the provided tool to access the wheel
nuts.
4. Use the lug wrench tip to remove any
wheel trim.
5. Loosen each wheel lug one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is off the ground.
Jacking the Vehicle
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is only supported by a vehicle
jack.
E166722
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and the
thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in an
emergency.
WARNING: The jack should be used
on level firm ground wherever possible.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
414
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle
that is being jacked.
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: The jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the service life of your vehicle.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
1. Position the jack at the jacking point
indicator arrow closest to the flat tire
location. Assemble the jack drive
extension to the lug wrench as shown
and use it to turn the jack drive clockwise
to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
E252489
Front jacking point
E275851
Rear jacking point
1. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.
2. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
3. Completely lower the vehicle by turning
the jack drive counterclockwise.
4. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 416).
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
415
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. You may have to
remove the wheel center cap prior to
pushing the retainer through the center
of the wheel. To remove the center cap,
press it off with the jack tool from the
inner side of the wheel. Pull on the cable
to align the components at the end of the
cable.
3. Using the swivel wrench, insert it through
the access hole behind the third row seat
and engage the winch.
4. Turn the swivel wrench clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
becomes harder to turn and the spare
tire winch ratchets or slips when the tire
is raised to maximum tightness. A clicking
sound can be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Carefully place all tools back into the tool
kit bag.
6. Reinstall the tool kit bag on the jack and
tighten the straps.
7. Reinstall the jack properly on the bracket
and secure with the wing nut.
8. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.
9. If the vehicle has an access panel,
reinstall.
10. Unblock the wheel.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the
wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach
the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact
at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in
loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
416
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
lb.ft (Nm)
1
Bolt Size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
417
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SpecificationMeasurement
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
10.0:1Compression ratio
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
E250666
418
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FP-79Cabin air filter
FL-500-SOil filter.
BAGM-49H8Battery.
SP-550Spark plugs.
FT-202Transmission filter.
WW-2247Windshield wiper blade.
WW-1107Rear window wiper blade.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Lincoln dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed Lincoln Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 547).
419
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
420
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission code
along with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
UTen-speed automatic transmission 10R80
421
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service
the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
18.5 qt (17.5 L)Engine coolant (Base radiator with auxiliary rear heat)
18.0 qt (17 L)Engine coolant (Heavy duty trailer towing with auxiliary rear heat)
Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
1.8 qt (1.7 L)Front axle
2.5 qt (2.4 L)
1
Rear axle
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
2
Automatic transmission fluid
1.6 qt (1.5 L) - 1.8 qt (1.7 L)Transfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift on the Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque on Demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
422
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
23.6 gal (89.3 L)Fuel tank
27.8 gal (105.2 L)Fuel tank (Navigator L)
37 oz (1.05 kg)A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada)
39 oz (1.11 kg)A/C refrigerant (Mexico)
6.1 fl oz (180 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and it is considered lubricated for life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless
you suspect a leak or submerge the axle in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
423
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-Q1SP
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-Q1SP
WSS-M97B57-A2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-13DL-G
WSS-M97B57-A2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-13DL-G
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
424
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-12-QULV
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-12-QULVC
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift on the Fly) (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift on the Fly) (Canada):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque on Demand) (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
425
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque on Demand) (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
426
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
CRCSL3151ESBMulti-purpose grease:
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN PLUS requirements
and display the API Certification Mark for
gasoline engines.
427
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
E276075
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage not covered by your
vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend DOT 4 Low Viscosity
(LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or
equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of
any fluid other than the recommended fluid
may cause degraded brake performance
and not meet our performance standards.
Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
428
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with
an authorized D.O.T. for North America and
an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance,
light brightness and pattern and safe
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage
the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
429
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
LEDLEDHeadlamp low beam.
LEDLEDHeadlamp high beam.
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDWelcome lighting lamps.
LEDLEDRear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indicator.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
LEDLEDReversing lamps.
LEDLEDLicense plate lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
430
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDGlove compartment lamp if equipped.
LEDLEDVanity mirror lamp.
LEDLEDMap lamp.
LEDLEDSecond row lamp.
LEDLEDRear dome lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
431
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530-1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
432
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in the
vehicle’s CD player.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
433
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as satellite radio,
may not be available in your location. Check
with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
434
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
Locking the Rear Audio Controls (If
Equipped)
E270448
Press and release the button to
lock the rear passenger audio
controls.
Inserting a CD (If Equipped)
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Note: The CD player slot is in the center
console. See Center Console (page 189).
Ejecting the CD (If Equipped)
E265032
Press and release the button to
eject a CD.
Selecting the Audio Modes (If Equipped)
E265276
Press and release the button to
access different audio modes, for
example AM, FM and CD.
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In CD mode, press and release to select the
next or previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or backward through
the current track.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to
select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news) press to find the next
or previous station in the category you select.
Rear Passenger Audio (If Equipped)
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selecting the Audio Modes
E265276
Press and release the button to
access different audio modes, for
example AM, FM and CD.
435
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
Switching the Display On and Off
E272035
Press and release the button.
Switching the Rear Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In CD mode, press and release to select the
next or previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or backward through
the current track.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to
select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news) press to find the next
or previous station in the category you select.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic
and entertainment satellite radio channels.
For more information and a complete list of
SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
436
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news,
weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM
satellite radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See
an authorized dealer for availability.
437
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a complete list
of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to
produce audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear shortly, or with
an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another
preset.
The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to
subscribe to the channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not include this
channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite
or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The process may take up
to three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
438
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
ActionConditionMessage
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are
either skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the channels available
for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices, if supported.
439
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
MEDIA HUB
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The media hub may be on the instrument
panel or center console.
The media hub may contain one or more of
the following inputs:
See USB Port (page 439).
440
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can simply
touch the item or option that you want to
select. The button changes color when you
select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
441
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E269856
442
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate
settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view.HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's
GPS location. See Settings (page 504).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside TemperatureD
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature.Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access to
all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment options.
Using the status and feature bar you can
quickly select the feature you want to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status bar
depending on market, vehicle options and
current operation. If a feature is not active,
the icon does not display. Certain icons may
move to the left or right depending on what
options are active.
443
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E270077
i
444
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system.Driver TemperatureA
When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon
displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering
wheel.
Heated steering wheelB
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the
driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are
linked, the passenger's temperature does not display.
Passenger TemperatureC
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you.Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows
more details about the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays the phone signal strength and the roaming signal strength.Signal StrengthI
This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone.Text MessageJ
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC.911 Assist OffK
This icon displays when a phone call is active.In-CallL
445
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Messages may also appear in the status bar
to provide you with notifications. You can
select the message to view the associated
feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can
control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs,
and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within
the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook
of your connected device.
Phone
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get
driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along
your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
446
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone
or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where
your settings and power information is located.
You can customize your system with various settings for the touch-
screen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact
with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth
and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on what
is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar indicating
the status of the voice command session.
See Using Voice Recognition (page 458).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some of
the SYNC 3 features on your information
display.
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3 screen:
447
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Audio
Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Navigation
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on
cluster level), and ability to cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *Phone
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll callsQuick dial
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
448
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if
the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of
the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Controls on the Steering
Wheel
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and hold
to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or
switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject
an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be
combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK
PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE
ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 89).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
• Power: Switch the audio system on and
off.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system.
• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
advance through available media modes.
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 432).
449
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
• DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
• Temperature, fan and climate control
buttons: Control the temperature, fan
speed or settings of the climate control
system. See Climate Control (page 152).
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do
it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains and
Roadside Emergencies sections of your
owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings (page
504).
450
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers
for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone
sustains damage or loses its connection to
SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for
and try to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of the
fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
451
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables out
of the way, so they do not interfere with
the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure
that you review your device's manual
before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, such
as Points of Interest reviews and ratings,
SiriusXM Travel Link sports information,
or ski condition search areas.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific
examples.
452
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
• Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
453
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
Lincoln Connect with Lincoln Way (If
Equipped)
With a Lincoln Connect-equipped vehicle,
you can use Lincoln Way® to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel level
and approximate mileage. You can also
schedule specific times to remotely start your
vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road as soon
as you are. Lincoln Way® is available through
a free download via the Apple App Store®
or Google Play™. Message and data rates
may apply. Services may be limited by mobile
phone network coverage area.
• FCC: LHJ-FAN
• IC: 2807E-FAN
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log into
your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to start
the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your use
of the system. Navigation updates cannot be
installed in the background, because the files
are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle, remove
anything that is plugged in the USB ports on
the media hub and plug in the USB drive
containing the update. When the USB drive
is plugged in, the installation should begin
immediately. After a successful installation,
the update is available the next time the
vehicle is started.
Please reference the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
454
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your Wi-
Fi network. You may have
to enter the security code if
the network is secured. The
system confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available Wi-
Fi Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature. If
you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 504). You can also perform a
master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting
(page 524).
If you would like to switch this feature on
later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system prompts
you to set up a Wi-Fi
connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your vehicle
off. The updates do not interrupt the normal
use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download
does not complete for any reason, the
download continues where it left off at the
next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon
activation of an update, a banner displays
on the touchscreen indicating the system
update. Select the icon to see more detail.
This icon displays for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection for
automatic updates to OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
Customer Assistance
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-521-4140.
Canada: 1-800-387-9333.
Mexico: 01-800-719-8466.
455
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC
3, the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data
may be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless
you delete them and are generally accessible
only in your vehicle when the cellular phone
or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.
You can find more information about the
Master Reset in General Settings. See
Settings (page 504). System data cannot be
accessed without special equipment and
access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. The
Lincoln Motor Company does not access the
system data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of The Lincoln Motor
Company.
HOME SCREEN
456
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E224962
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
457
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Home screen displayTileItem
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features
also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, text messaging and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current route in real time.Navigation *C
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and
distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays to
access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio and
climate controls. By using voice commands,
you can keep your hands on the wheel and
your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice button
on the steering wheel and wait for
the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context and
the description of the command tell you what
to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
458
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For
example, you could say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of
choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages
of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen.Help
Included here are some of the most popular
commands for each SYNC 3 feature.
459
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM
1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth connected device.Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device.USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre
to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
460
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to
browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
1
This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C).Set Temperature ___
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system.
461
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 504).Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny".Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call
Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
462
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you can continue saying the number.<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you would like to hear.Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
463
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following commands
to set a destination or find a point of interest. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more than
20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific
state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find
restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for.Find the Nearest <POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
464
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
465
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3.Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.Find Mobile Apps
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the mobile app on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app if the app is running on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app, followed
by help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be
available in all markets. Activation and a
subscription are required.
466
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Forecast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On
467
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust the
volume of the system voice prompts. While
prompt is active, adjust the volume control
up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or turn
the fan knob) to increase or decrease the
fan speed to the setting you prefer.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
468
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E207617
469
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
Message and descriptionMessage
C Presets
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
*SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.Apps
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
470
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on the
radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen,
select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only enter
a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's call
numbers, you can select:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit without
changing the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station and
then press and hold one of the memory
preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while
the system saves the station and then
returns.
There are two preset banks available for AM
and three banks for FM. To access additional
presets, tap the preset button. The indicator
on the preset button shows which bank of
presets you are currently viewing.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news,
weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM
satellite radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term that begins on
the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See
an authorized dealer for availability.
471
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SiriusXM
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station.Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
472
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as
you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different
preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you
to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on
any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press
and hold one of the memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the preset
button shows which bank of presets you are
currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
473
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a
weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interference
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This message should disap-
pear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce
audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
474
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this channel.Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or
SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring signal…
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the channels available for
your vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
475
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for
stations that have more than 1 HD multicast
(For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and
Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this
button allows you to cycle through all of the
HD stations on that specific frequency. For
example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1,
HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly
causes the radio to cycle through the HD
stations in a cyclic increasing order.
476
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes
before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital
broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the
station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or
digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
477
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio broad-
caster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio
volume.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the
audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast
channel when recalling a preset or
from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form. *Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form. *Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
478
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from DTS Inc. U.S. and foreign
patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS Inc.
Ford Motor Company and DTS Inc. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
* You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
CD
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat.Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number
one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
479
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not
highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number
one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently
playing track, press the cover art or Info
button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide
30-second skip buttons when you listen to
audio books or podcasts. These buttons
allow you to skip forward or backward within
a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.Browse
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all
tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
New Search
Play All
Playlists
Artist
480
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the
category you are browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your
USB device.
Explore Device
481
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the instrument
panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB media
devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb
drives, and charge devices if they support
this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain audio
apps such as Pandora or iHeartRadio through
a USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 501).
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, iPhone,
and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000
songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
482
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of the system. Once you pair your cell phone,
you can access many options using the
touchscreen or voice commands. While the
system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
483
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E251249
G
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call ListA
484
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You
can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.ContactsB
Selecting this button allows you to choose a
specific letter to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options.Phone SettingsC
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts.
Gives you access to the list of paired or connected Bluetooth devices allowing you to change
or select a device.
Change DeviceD
Displays all recent text messages.Text MessagesE
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone KeypadF
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a call.Call
Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do
not display on the screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not DisturbG
485
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Users with phones having voice services may
see a button to access the feature. For
example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A
press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from the
SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 458). You can use the touchscreen to
place calls as well.
486
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the number
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an entry
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in your
phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and
number display on the screen along with the
call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
487
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the button
on the steering
wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
Item
Mute You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Privacy
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the sender name and ID, if supported by
your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm
to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
488
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer
with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest
iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 439).
2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on your
phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay.
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple
CarPlay. Select the name of your device
and set the Apple CarPlay switch to off.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay
home screen and select the SYNC app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to your
device from Google Play to prepare your
device (this may require mobile data
usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 439).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on your
device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device (this may
require mobile data usage).
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and set the Android Auto switch to
off.
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
489
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer
icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the
bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch
the option to return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D city
maps show detailed outlines of buildings,
visible land use, landscape features, and
detailed railroad infrastructure for the most
essential cities around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models of
entire city areas including navigable roads,
parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D
landmarks and city models appear in 3D map
mode only. Coverage of these varies and
improves with updated map releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see a
farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset increments.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the
map.
The information bar tells you the names of
streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over
them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on the
right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
490
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E251780
E251779
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI) grouping
icon: You can choose up to three
POI icons to display on the map. If
the chosen POIs are located close
together or are at the same location a box is
used to display a single category icon
instead of repeating the same icon, in order
to reduce clutter. When you select the box
on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the pop
up to see a list of the available POIs. You can
scroll through and select POIs from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow
will be indicated on the map by green (clear),
yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road
highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the
information is available and varies across the
US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different types
of incidents.
You can set a destination by hovering above
a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
491
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example,
you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
492
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destinations
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Select this option to remove all previous destinations.Delete All
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select:Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select:Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
493
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination bar.Add a Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered.Search
Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen.Save
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the
favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle configuration):Point of Interest (POI)
Categories
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to
find what you are looking for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
494
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options.Start
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then
returns you to the map mode screen.
Cancel
495
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination.Start
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat
route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to
the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your
destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to
cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
496
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation.Highway Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they
are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations.
You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route.Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A
screen then appears and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires
an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences.Navigation Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen.Cancel Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
497
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information
on how to set waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can also have
the system set the
order for you by
pressing:
GoTo return to your
route press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route
as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass)
while on an active route. This brings up
the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination has
been selected, the screen allows you to
set the destination as a waypoint by
selecting:
498
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your
waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the
location. You can select up to five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and sent
to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of
your vehicle can be viewed within the app.
You can also view walking directions to your
vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your navigation
system using a computer or phone using
AppLink.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
499
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address, phone number and a star rating.
Press More Information to see a photo, a
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation
and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate and
subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link information. It helps you locate
the best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see current
sports scores. See Apps (page 501).
The system calculates a reasonable efficient
route based on available speed limits, traffic,
and road conditions. You may know a local
short cut that is more efficient at a given time
than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you
should expect a slight difference in minutes
or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States
and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
You can also visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model of
your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
500
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to HERE
by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
HERE evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink
enabled smartphone apps. When an app is
running through AppLink, you can control
main features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls. The
system enables voice, steering wheel, and
touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink
enabled smartphone apps.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded. Some
apps will automatically work with no setup.
Some apps will automatically work with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
501
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford in
the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage statistics
and debugging information. We retain this
data for only as long as necessary to provide
this service, troubleshoot, and improve
products and services and to offer you
products and services that may interest you
where allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each
connected device the first time you select a
mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not
responsible for any additional charges you
may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 504).
App Permissions
The system organizes the app permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change a
permission group status any time when not
driving, by using the settings menu. While in
the settings menu, you can also see the data
included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle information,
Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed,
and/or Push notifications. You can enable all
groups or none of them during the initial app
permissions prompts. The settings menu
offers individual group permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions, apps
will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3
unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings
menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
502
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current
traffic alerts, view the current weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see scores
to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the
chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
Map
503
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and adjust
the settings for many of the system features.
To access additional settings, swipe the
screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the
following:
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
504
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off.Speed Compensated Vol.
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media device
such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is
the active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following options
for active devices only.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you
can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing,
you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
505
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’ s music files. If no cover art for the files
exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files.
This overrides any cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist and album.Gracenote® Management
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Database Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device.Device Information
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Update Media Index
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows
on the right adjust the minute. You can then
select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
506
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone Update
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to GPS Time
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access the
following:
ActionMenu Item
OnBluetooth
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device
is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing
a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a
device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
507
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
508
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in the previous table.Add a Bluetooth Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options:
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected
device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to
date.
Auto-Download Contacts
509
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose:Sort By:
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact
list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive a call. This option may not be available
for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ringtone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
510
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert (Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message.Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when
the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call.Roaming Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low.Low Battery Notification
511
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
911 Assist
Enabling 911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can switch this feature on and off by sliding
the scrollbar as follows.
911 Assist
Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature on.
You can set your contacts in the phone book
for emergency quick dialing.
Setting Emergency Contacts
Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.
From the settings screen select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.911 Assist
Select this option as it displays on the screen.Set Emergency Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option under <Emergency contact 1>.Select a Contact
512
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
The screen lists contacts in the phone book.
Select the contact that you want to set as
emergency contact. You can set Emergency
Contact 2 by same process. You can set two
Emergency Contacts in total.
Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source such
as AM or FM is the active media source.
Pressing the button allows you to access the
following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on current
radio source, If Available)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system
display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets (AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the
currently tuned source.
513
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM
This button is available if SiriusXM is the
active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that category.Set Category for Seek
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial
PIN is 1234.
Parental Lockout
Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an alert or delete all alerts.Edit Alerts
You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots.Breadcrumbs
514
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon is displayed on the
map regardless of this setting.
POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed
by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map.Incident Map Icons
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred
route setting.
Always Use ___ Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance.Use HOV Lanes
515
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination.Automatically Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Eco Time Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based
on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible.
Dynamic Route Guidance
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance Prompts
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
516
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection
The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data plan
associated with the connected device.
The connected devices send data to us in
the United States. The encrypted information
includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number,
anonymous usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. We are not
responsible for any additional charges you
may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on
SYNC 3.
OnMobile Apps
Off
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu
disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app updates.Update Mobile Apps
There are three possible statuses:
517
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive an update.No update is required.The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Select this button if an update is required and
you want to request this update manually. For
example, when your mobile device is connected
to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select:
Request Update
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing
the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also be SYNC 3
enabled apps listed under
these options.
Note: We is not responsible or liable for any
damages or loss of privacy relating to usage
of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle
data that you approve us to provide to an
app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
518
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touch-
screen.
Touch Screen Beep
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have
an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection.
Automatic System Updates
Information pertaining to the system and its software.About SYNC
Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal
data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi & Hotspot (If Equipped)
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
System Wi-Fi
You can access the following:
519
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates.Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.Available Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may
require a security code to connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such
as the signal strength, connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already
connected.
Wi-Fi Available Notifications
Vehicle Hotspot
You can access the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password.Settings
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.Data Usage
Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.Manage Devices
520
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility
to remove the vehicle from the vehicle
network carrier account when ownership of
the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would
like to remove the vehicle from the account
for any reason, please contact your vehicle
network carrier for more information.
Note: Data, such as the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between us and the vehicle
network carrier to provide the Vehicle
Hotspot service in accordance with your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability, and may be used to enable
a seamless transition from an old to new
embedded modem and to confirm any
updates are successfully delivered.
Note: For your convenience data usage may
be available for monitoring under Settings
but may not reflect actual or current usage.
The vehicle network carrier is responsible
for providing information about your account.
Please contact the vehicle network carrier
for more information.
Note: We may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color all
the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a personal
door keypad code. To add or erase a
personal code, you first need to enter the
five-digit factory set code. You can find this
code on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box or from your authorized dealer.
521
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner's manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your system.
You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
522
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen to switch it back on.Display Off
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside
light level.
Auto
The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing.Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier.Night
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions.Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings by
selecting the following options.
523
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations.Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's name with you before
making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands
when you press the voice.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode, a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit code
must be entered to enable and disable valet
mode. You can use any PIN you chose but
you must use the same PIN to disable valet
mode. The system asks you to input the
code.
Note: If the system is locked and you cannot
remember the PIN, please contact the
Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
LincolnFord
United States: 1-800-
521-4140
United States and
Canada: 1-800-392-
3673
Canada: 1-800-387-
9333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website.
524
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings on your cell
phone may be affecting SYNC 3
performance.
There is background noise
during a phone call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for
the microphone icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the
door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that
your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to be restarted.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not able to
download my phonebook.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
525
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Limitations on your cell phone's capab-
ility.
The system says "Phone-
book downloaded" but my
SYNC 3 phonebook is
empty or is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to
your cell phone's memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my cell phone
to SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your
device, then trying again.
Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative
to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
526
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your
vehicle make and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system
to activate this settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if
the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone.
527
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not
supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through
Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Audible text messages do
not work on my cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual
for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider
and software version.
This is a cell phone limitation.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your
vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or
active security settings.
528
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize my device when I start
my vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have
started the media player on your device.
This is a device-dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
The device is not connected.
Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then
reconnect it to SYNC 3.
The device is in a bad state.
Make sure that all song details are populated.
Your music files may not contain the
correct artist, song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize music that is on my
device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass
storage to media transfer protocol class.
The song may have copyright protection
that does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 468).The file format is not supported by SYNC
3.
Update media index. See Settings (page 504).The device needs to be re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
529
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect my device,
I sometimes do not hear
any sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB, select AirPlay from the devices
Control Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay
from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Connect a compatible device or media player.
The device or media player is incompat-
ible.
SYNC 3 does not display
the song information,
repeat, or shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connection.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless
it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address.
Multiple Access points within range with
the same SSID.
530
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Position the vehicle close to the access point with the front of the
vehicle facing the access point direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may
cause interference.
Weak signal probably due to distance
from the access point, obstruction or high
interference.
Disconnecting after
successful connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the
vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the access point. If you
have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the access point. If all windows are tinted, you can
open the windows in the direction of the access point if that is feasible.
There may be an obstruction between
SYNC 3 and the access point.
Poor signal seen by SYNC
3 despite being near a
access point.
Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
Please set the network to visible and try again.The access point was defined as a
hidden network.
An access point is not
listed in the list of available
networks.
531
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not provide an access point.SYNC 3 does not currently provide a
access point.
SYNC 3 is not seen when
searching for Wi-Fi
networks from your phone
or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates
good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped access
point where the environment is more predictable.
Poor signal strength, too far from the
access point, access point is supporting
multiple connections, slow Internet
connection or other problems.
Software download takes
too long.
Test the connection with another device, if the access point requires
a subscription, you may contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is no new soft-
ware. The connected access point may
be a managed one and it requires either
a subscription or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
SYNC 3 seems to connect
with a access point and the
signal strength is excellent
but the software is not
being updated.
532
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS
2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3
in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable.
You did not connect an Applink Compat-
ible phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
Mobile Apps," SYNC 3
does not find any applica-
tions.
Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of
the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running
on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have
a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed
and running on your mobile device.
My phone is connected,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if
you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select it and restart the app.
If the app does not have that option, select the phone's settings menu
and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find Mobile
Apps" on SYNC 3.
Sometimes apps do not properly close
and re-open their connection to SYNC 3,
over ignition cycles, for example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home
button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu.
533
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are
in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-connect
to your phone if you press the "Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue on some older
versions of the Android operating system
that may cause apps that were found on
your previous vehicle drive to not be
found again if you did not switch
Bluetooth off.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the
USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the
application and restart it.
You may need to reset the USB connec-
tion to SYNC 3.
My iPhone is connected,
my app is running, I
restarted the app but I still
cannot find it on SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's
volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the
device.
The Bluetooth volume on the phone may
be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my
media app on SYNC 3, but
there is no sound or the
sound is very low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If
the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have a limited
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can
use to connect. If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports, you will not see
all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on
my phone listed in the
SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
Menu.
534
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice
commands at the beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand what I am saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list
of voice commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command.You may be speaking too soon or at the
wrong time.
Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media
section.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand the name of a song
or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device.
For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix
featuring Jennifer Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you
have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name may have some
special characters that are not being
recognized by SYNC 3.
535
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your
phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe
Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand or is calling the
wrong contact when I want
to make a call.
Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters
like *, - or +.
The contact name may contain special
characters.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign names
stored on my cell phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE.
Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the
soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you,
giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting.
536
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names
(for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunci-
ation for these artists.
You may be saying the foreign names
using the currently selected language for
SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign tracks,
artists, albums, genres and
playlist names from my
media player or USB flash
drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded
human voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompt
technology.
The system generates
voice prompts and the
pronunciation of some
words may not be accurate
for my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
537
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Personal Profiles have not been set up.
I cannot create a profile.
An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park or was shifted out of
Run or Park while creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a keyfob when prompted.
I cannot link a keyfob.
The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and
an overwrite was declined.
A profile recall was performed while linking a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park, or was shifted out of
Run or Park while linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by Personal Profiles.
My personalized settings do not save.
A different Personal Profile is active than expected.
538
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Another user has changed settings for the wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked to a profile.
The keyfob being used is not linked to a profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start is being pressed on a linked
keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the Guest or previously active
profile.
539
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the Personal Profiles menu. You may
need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a keyfob.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed. This could happen if you
let dealership add a new keyfob to replace lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Master Reset had been performed without your acknowledgement.
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text
display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most
popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available,
SYNC 3 remains in the current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support the currently
selected language for the instrument
cluster and information and entertainment
display.
The language selected for
the instrument cluster and
information and entertain-
ment display does not
match the SYNC 3
language (phone, USB,
Bluetooth audio, voice
control and voice prompts).
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
540
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore
functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text
messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio
Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then
resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
541
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit the online
store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Side window deflectors*.
• Splash guards.
Interior Style
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment system*.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Portable audio speaker*.
• Roof rack and carriers*.
• SUV camping tent*.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Car cover*.
• Remote start.
• Roadside assistance kits*.
• Vehicle security.
• Wheel locks.
• Window sunscreen*.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
542
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
543
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH
LINCOLN PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE
PLAN.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans
(U.S. Only)
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It’s the
extended service plan backed by the Lincoln
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage. When you visit your
Lincoln Dealer, insist on genuine Lincoln
Protect extended service plans!
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Protect
extended service plan. With Lincoln Protect
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four mechanical Lincoln Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it’ s
probably easier to list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Lincoln dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the
day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
544
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lincoln Protect
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
Lincoln Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved with
no credit check or hassles. To learn more,
call our Lincoln Protect extended service
plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Protect extended
service plan. Lincoln Protect extended
service plan is the only service contract
backed by Lincoln Motor Company of
Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you
purchase, Lincoln Protect extended service
plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
545
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lincoln Protect
There are several Lincoln Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each
plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Protect
extended service plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Protect extended service plan that
is right for you.
546
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Lincoln Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 418).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Lincoln and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Lincoln, Motorcraft and
Lincoln authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Lincoln authorized parts
they may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
547
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km)
of the message appearing. Make sure you
reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after
each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator
Reset (page 363).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or
5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km) between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
The Lincoln Motor Company has
recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based
upon engineering testing. The Lincoln Motor
Company relies upon this testing to
determine the most appropriate mileage for
replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance schedules
that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Lincoln, Motorcraft or Lincoln
authorized re-manufactured replacement
parts engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Lincoln
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We
do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of your
vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult
your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Lincoln approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
548
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
549
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Six Months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
550
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
551
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi (5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
552
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection - recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level - vehicles with dipstick. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
553
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
2
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km)
Change front axle fluid - Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid - Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Change engine coolant - if your vehicles has yellow-colored coolant.
3
Every 200,000 mi (320,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance
for the interval.
2
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3
Initial replacement at ten years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every five years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
554
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3,000 mi
(4,800 km) of the message appearing in the
information display prompting you to change
your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi
(40,000 km)). Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints (if equipped with grease fittings).Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
555
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
556
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Change engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road Operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
557
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case (Four-wheel drive
vehicles) fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected or
the assembly has been submerged in water.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. The Lincoln Motor Company,
however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services
performed at the specified intervals and to
record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi
(4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and replacement
of the engine air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
558
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
559
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
560
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
561
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
562
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
563
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
564
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
565
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
566
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
567
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
568
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
569
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
570
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
571
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
572
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
573
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
574
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
575
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
576
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
577
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
578
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes
and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the following
table. We do not provide special provisions
or conditions for installations or use.
579
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Car
E239120
580
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
581
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Truck
E239121
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
582
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
Note: After the installation of radio frequency
transmitters, check for disturbances from
and to all electrical equipment in your
vehicle, both in the standby and transmit
modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields generated
inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter
installed do not exceed applicable human
exposure requirements.
583
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
584
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
585
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
586
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (I) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
587
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
588
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
589
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
590
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
591
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
592
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
593
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’ s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or without notice to you. You agree
to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to
time to review the then current version of
this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
594
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
595
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
596
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
597
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
598
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights
reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
599
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
600
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”
601
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a partic-
ular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-
sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agree-
ment, Client shall provide such End-
Users, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided
602
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effective-
ness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agree-
ment, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
603
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argentina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-
01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre” . The fore-
going notice requirement for
Jordan Data is a material term
of the Agreement. If Client or
any of its permitted subli-
censees (if any) fail to meet
such requirement, HERE shall
have the right to terminate
Client’ s license with respect to
the Jordan Data.
Jordan
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
604
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”
shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Trans-
action that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agree-
ment with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from
Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.
605
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compli-
ance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright
and database right 2010
Contains Royal Mail data ©
Royal Mail copyright and
database right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage:
© Bundesamt für
Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
606
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
update such list from time to time. The
license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDS-
TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics
Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND
CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE
OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES,
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER
HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT
BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING
CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND
AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN
ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH
OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE,
END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR
ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE
SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH
PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM
AROSE.
607
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND
HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS
FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY
DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH,
ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE,
OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD
AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT
GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS
TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING
TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE.
THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL
BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER MAKES NO
WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR
PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES
OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL
AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE
TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A)
ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS,
OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED
BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED
BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY
IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER
RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM
AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF
ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY
FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S
USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING
IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
608
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
609
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
610
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
611
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
612
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave radiation
motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter the
frequency, increase the power or change the
characteristics and functions of the original
design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference be
detected, immediately stop using the device
and only resume usage after ensuring that
there is no longer any interference. For the
legal telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial, scientific
and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept certain
terms and conditions. The following is a brief
summary of the terms and conditions that
apply to you. To view the full terms and
conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA
Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your
personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to provide
SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
613
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
SUNA Products and/or Services are intended
as an aid to personal motoring and travel
planning, and do not provide comprehensive
or accurate information on all occasions. On
occasions, you may experience additional
delay as a result of using SUNA Products
and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is
not intended, or suitable, for use in
applications where time of arrival or driving
directions may impact the safety of the public
or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and active,
remain at all times responsible for observing
all relevant laws and codes of safe driving.
In particular, you agree to only actively
operate SUNA Products and/or Services
when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and
it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of the
SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable for
technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA
Products and/or Services at any time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the
manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any
third party for any damages either direct,
indirect, incidental, consequential or
otherwise arising out of the use of or inability
to use SUNA Products and/or Services even
if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised
of the possibility of such damages. You also
acknowledge that the neither Intelematics
nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any
warranties that relate to the availability,
accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products
and/or Services, and to the extent which it
is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State or
Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development may
mean that some information is not entirely
up-to-date. The information in this document
is subject to change without notice.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
614
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Statement
IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version
216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0
216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1
216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
These devices comply with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device does not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device accepts any interference
received, including interference that
could cause undesired operation.
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
Argentina
E207816
615
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Brazil
E197509
Canada
IC: 850K-11545917
European Union EU
E207818
Ghana
E253824
Jordan
E253823
Malaysia
E253822
Mexico
E253812
E253813
Moldova
E197811
616
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Morocco
E207821
Oman
E253817
Philippines
E198001
Russia
E253816
Serbia
E197844
Singapore
E253820
617
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
South Africa
E198002
South Korea
E253819
Taiwan
E203679
Ukraine
E253818
United Arab Emirates
E207817
United States of America
FCC ID: OUC11545917
618
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid
Range Radar
Argentina
E269659
Ghana
E269662
Jordan
E269660
Morocco
E269661
South Africa
E269664
619
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
United Arab Emirates
E269663
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Anti-Theft System
Argentina
E274065
Brazil
E269675
Canada
IC: 850K-11545917
620
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Djibouti
E274068
Ghana
E269674
Jamaica
E274067
Jordan
E269666
Malaysia
E269673
Morocco
E269670
621
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Paraguay
E274066
Pakistan
E275754
Serbia
E269672
Singapore
E269676
South Africa
E269667
Ukraine
E269671
622
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
United Arab Emirates
E269668
United States of America
FCC ID: OUC11545917
Vietnam
E269677
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Radio Transceiver Module
Canada
IC: 3659A-F03AM315RX
IC: 3659A-F04AM902TRX
Djibouti
E272192
Jamaica
E272193
623
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Jordan
E272194
Morocco
E269683
Pakistan
E269684
E287633
Paraguay
E272195
Serbia
E269681
624
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
South Africa
E269685
Ukraine
E269682
United Arab Emirates
E272196
United States of America
FCC ID: LTQF03AM315RX
FCC ID: LTQF04AM902TRX
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Blind Spot Information System
Canada
RSS-310 compliant, per FCC Test report no.:
1-8707/14-01-03
Ghana
E269695
Malaysia
E269697
625
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
South Africa
E269696
United Arab Emirates
E269694
United States of America
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
Vietnam
E269693
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Wireless Charging
United Arab Emirates
E272903
626
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
South Korea
E273475
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC 3
Brazil
E252722
E282218
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Cruise Control Module
Canada
IC: 3432A-0065TR
United States of America
FCC ID: L2C0065TR
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Body Control Module
Canada
IC: 7812A-A2C738448
Model # : M : A2C750526
Model # : M : A2C750561
United States of America
FCC ID: M3NA2C738448
Model # : M : A2C750526
Model # : M : A2C750561
Radio Frequency Certification for Keys
and Remote Controls
Canada
IC : 7812A-A2C931423
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
IC: 3248A-A08TAA
IC: 3248A-A08TDA
United States of America
FCC ID : M3N-A2C931423
FCC ID : M3N-A2C931426
FCC ID : N5F-A08TAA
FCC ID : N5F-A08TDA
627
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Statement for Audio
Unit
Canada
IC: 3043A-UP375AHU
United States
FCC ID: NT8-16UP375AHU
628
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Appendices
3
360 Degree Camera...................................252
Advanced Camera Views................................252
Camera Views.....................................................252
Front Camera......................................................253
Keep Out Zone....................................................253
Side Camera........................................................253
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................216
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................152
About This Manual............................................7
ABS
See: Brakes..........................................................225
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...............................................................226
Accessories...................................................542
Exterior Style.......................................................542
Interior Style.........................................................542
Lifestyle.................................................................542
Peace of Mind.....................................................542
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............256
Active Park Assist.........................................240
Using Active Park Assist...................................242
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................101
Speed Dependent Lamps..................................101
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................374
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................376
Vertical Aim Adjustment....................................374
Adjusting the Pedals......................................93
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................89
End of Travel Position..........................................89
Memory Feature....................................................89
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps.................................101
Airbag Disposal...............................................60
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................152
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............376
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Anti-Theft
Alarm System....................................................86
See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior
Sensor.................................................................85
Ambient Lighting...........................................104
Adjusting the Brightness...................................104
Changing the Color............................................104
Switching Ambient Lighting Off.......................104
Switching Ambient Lighting On.......................104
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Anti-Theft
Alarm System................................................86
Arming the Alarm..................................................86
Disarming the Alarm............................................86
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior
Sensor.............................................................85
Alarm Settings.......................................................85
Alarm System.........................................................85
Arming the Alarm..................................................85
Ask on Exit..............................................................85
Disarming the Alarm............................................86
Triggering the Alarm............................................85
Appendices....................................................579
Apps.................................................................501
.................................................................................501
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.....................502
At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators...............119
Headlamps On Warning Chime........................119
Keyless Warning Alert.........................................119
Parking Brake On Warning Chime...................119
Audio Control..................................................90
Seek, Next or Previous.......................................90
629
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Audio System................................................432
General Information...........................................432
Audio Unit.......................................................434
Adjusting the Volume........................................434
Changing Radio Stations..................................434
Ejecting the CD...................................................435
Inserting a CD......................................................435
Locking the Rear Audio Controls...................435
Rear Passenger Audio......................................435
Selecting the Audio Modes.............................435
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off............435
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.......435
Auto Hold.......................................................229
Using Auto Hold.................................................230
Autolamps.........................................................98
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........99
Automatic Climate Control.........................152
Accessing Rear Climate Controls...................152
Accessing the Climate Control Menu............152
Setting the Blower Motor Speed....................152
Setting the Temperature...................................152
Switching Auto Mode On and Off...................152
Switching Defrost On and Off..........................153
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................153
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off..........153
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................153
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off.......153
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................153
Automatic High Beam Control...................100
Automatic High Beam Indicator.......................101
Switching the System On and Off....................101
Automatic Transmission..............................210
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................215
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.........................214
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................215
SelectShift™ Automatic Transmission.............213
Understanding the Shift Positions of your
Automatic Transmission................................210
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................369
Auto-Start-Stop..............................................196
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop..................................198
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...................................196
Autowipers.......................................................94
Autowipers Settings.............................................94
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit..........................94
Auxiliary Power Points.................................185
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................185
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................185
USB Port and Power Point Locations.............185
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery........................371
Blind Spot Information System..................271
..................................................................................271
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow....................................................................272
Switching the System On and Off..................275
System Errors......................................................275
Using the Blind Spot Information
System...............................................................271
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System...............271
Body Styling Kits...........................................387
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............359
Booster Seats..................................................33
Types of Booster Seats.......................................33
Brake Fluid Check........................................370
Brakes.............................................................225
General Information...........................................225
Breaking-In.....................................................323
Bulb Specification Chart.............................429
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................156
630
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Capacities and Specifications...................422
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................428
Specifications......................................................424
Cargo Nets.....................................................289
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................379
Catalytic Converter......................................207
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................208
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing.....................................................209
Center Console..............................................189
Changing a Bulb...........................................376
LED Lamps...........................................................376
Changing a Fuse...........................................357
Fuses......................................................................357
Changing a Road Wheel.............................410
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.........................................................411
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools..............411
Tire Change Procedure.....................................412
Changing the 12V Battery...........................371
Battery Management System..........................373
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................376
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................374
Checking MyKey System Status.................69
MyKey Distance....................................................69
Number of Admin Keys.......................................70
Number of MyKeys...............................................69
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................373
Childminder Mirror........................................109
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................48
Child Restraint Positioning...........................36
Child Safety.......................................................18
General Information..............................................18
Child Safety Locks..........................................38
Left-Hand Side.......................................................38
Right-Hand Side....................................................38
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................384
Cleaning Products........................................378
Materials................................................................378
Cleaning the Engine.....................................381
Cleaning the Exterior...................................379
Cleaning the Headlamps..................................379
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................380
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................380
Stripes or Graphics............................................380
Underbody...........................................................380
Under Hood.........................................................380
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................384
Cleaning the Interior....................................382
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior..............................................................382
Cleaning the Wheels...................................385
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................381
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................69
Climate Control..............................................152
Climate Controlled Seats............................179
Ventilated Seats...................................................179
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.............................364
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........59
Creating a MyKey...........................................68
Programming and Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................69
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................275
Blocked Sensors.................................................278
Switching the System Off and On..................278
System Errors......................................................278
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................278
System Limitations.............................................278
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System.............275
Cruise Control.................................................90
Principle of Operation.......................................255
Type One................................................................90
Type Two..................................................................91
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................255
Customer Assistance...................................333
631
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
D
Data Recording................................................10
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.......................................10
Daytime Running Lamps...............................99
Type One - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)..........................................99
Type Two - Configurable...................................100
Declaration of Conformity...........................614
Radio Frequency Statement.............................615
Direction Indicators......................................102
Lane Change........................................................102
Doors and Locks.............................................72
Drive Mode Control.....................................284
Lincoln Drive Modes..........................................284
Driver Alert.....................................................264
Using Driver Alert...............................................265
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................52
Children and Airbags...........................................53
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................53
Driving Aids...................................................264
Driving Hints..................................................323
Driving Through Water................................324
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................99
E
Economical Driving......................................323
Electric Parking Brake.................................226
Applying the Electric Parking Brake..............226
Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake.................................................................227
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake.................................................................227
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge..............................................................227
Electromagnetic Compatibility..................579
Emission Law................................................206
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance............207
Tampering With a Noise Control
System..............................................................206
End User License Agreement...................584
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ....................................584
Engine Block Heater....................................194
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................195
Engine Coolant Check................................364
Adding Coolant...................................................365
Coolant Change..................................................367
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management...................................................368
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................367
Recycled Coolant...............................................366
Severe Climates.................................................366
Engine Emission Control............................206
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................83
Engine Oil Check.........................................362
Adding Engine Oil..............................................363
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................362
Engine Specifications...................................418
Drivebelt Routing.................................................418
Entertainment................................................468
AM/FM Radio........................................................471
Apps.......................................................................482
Bluetooth Stereo or USB..................................479
CD...........................................................................479
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)..............475
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated)..........471
Sources.................................................................470
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information...................................482
USB Ports.............................................................482
Environment......................................................15
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake.............................226
Essential Towing Checks..............................311
Before Towing a Trailer......................................318
Hitches...................................................................312
632
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.................314
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).............................................319
Safety Chains........................................................313
Trailer Brakes........................................................314
Trailer Hitch Cover...............................................311
Trailer Lamps.........................................................317
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).........................................................311
When Towing a Trailer........................................318
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording.............................................10
Export Unique Options...................................14
Exterior Mirrors..............................................106
360-Degree Camera..........................................108
Auto-Dimming Feature......................................108
Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................107
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................108
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................107
Heated Exterior Mirrors.....................................108
Lincoln Welcome Mat.........................................108
Memory Mirrors...................................................108
Power Exterior Mirrors.......................................106
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................108
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................40
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.......................................44
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................42
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy..................42
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................410
Floor Mats.......................................................324
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................101
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................93
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................216
Front Fog Lamps............................................101
Front Parking Aid..........................................238
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................238
Front Passenger Sensing System..............54
Fuel and Refueling........................................199
Fuel Consumption.......................................205
Advertised Capacity..........................................205
Fuel Economy.....................................................205
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................200
Fuel Filter.........................................................371
Fuel Quality...................................................200
Choosing the Right Fuel..................................200
Fuel Shutoff....................................................327
Fuses................................................................341
Fuse Specification Chart.............................341
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel............351
Power Distribution Box......................................341
G
Garage Door Opener....................................181
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener..............181
Gauges..............................................................113
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..............114
Fuel Gauge.............................................................114
Left and Right Information Group.....................114
Status Bar...............................................................114
Gearbox
See: Transmission...............................................210
General Information on Radio
Frequencies....................................................61
Intelligent Access..................................................61
General Maintenance Information...........547
Multi-Point Inspection.......................................550
Owner Checks and Services...........................548
Protecting Your Investment..............................547
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.............................547
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................547
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................337
633
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Getting the Services You Need................333
Away From Home...............................................333
Global Opening and Closing......................106
Closing the Windows.........................................106
Opening the Windows.......................................106
H
Hazard Flashers............................................327
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.......................374
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................99
Headlamp Leveling........................................101
Headrest
See: Head Restraints..........................................159
Head Restraints.............................................159
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................159
Front Seat Manual Head Restraints................159
Head Up Display...........................................148
Configuring The Head Up Display..................149
Head Up Display (HUD).....................................148
Head Up Display Information...........................148
Maintaining Your Head Up Display..................151
Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................156
Heated Rear Window...................................156
Heated Seats..................................................177
Front Seats............................................................177
Rear Seats.............................................................178
Heated Steering Wheel................................92
Heated Windshield.......................................156
Windshield Wiper De-Icer.................................156
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................152
Hill Descent Control....................................235
Principle of Operation.......................................235
Hill Start Assist..............................................228
Switching the System On and Off..................228
Using Hill Start Assist........................................228
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................154
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................154
General Hints........................................................154
Quickly Cooling the Interior..............................154
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................154
Recommended Settings for Cooling..............154
Recommended Settings for Heating..............154
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................226
Home Screen................................................456
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............359
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................334
Information Display Control..........................91
Information Displays.....................................120
General Information............................................120
Information Messages.................................125
Active Park............................................................126
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................126
Adaptive Headlamps..........................................127
Alarm.......................................................................127
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................127
Battery and Charging System..........................128
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System...............................................................129
Doors and Locks..................................................130
Driver Alert............................................................130
Drivetrain................................................................131
Four-Wheel Drive................................................132
Fuel.........................................................................133
Hill Start Assist.....................................................134
Keys and Intelligent Access..............................134
Lane Keeping System........................................135
Maintenance.........................................................136
MyKey.....................................................................137
Off Road.................................................................138
Park Aid..................................................................138
Park Brake.............................................................139
Power Steering....................................................140
Pre-Collision Assist..............................................141
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™..................................141
634
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Remote Start.........................................................143
Seats.......................................................................143
Stability Control....................................................143
Starting System ...................................................144
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................144
Trailer......................................................................145
Transmission.........................................................146
Installing Child Restraints.............................20
Child Seats.............................................................20
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................28
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts...........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................26
Using Tether Straps..............................................28
Instrument Cluster..........................................113
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................99
Instrument Panel Overview...........................16
Interior Lamps................................................103
Front Interior Lamp.............................................103
Rear Interior Lamps.............................................104
Interior Mirror.................................................108
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................109
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................328
Connecting the Jumper Cables......................328
Jump Starting......................................................329
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................328
Removing the Jumper Cables.........................330
K
Keyless Entry....................................................76
Displaying the Factory-Set Code......................78
Locking and Unlocking........................................77
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................76
Keyless Starting..............................................191
Switching the Ignition On...................................191
Keys and Remote Controls............................61
L
Lane Keeping System.................................265
Switching the System On and Off..................266
System Display...................................................268
System Settings..................................................267
Troubleshooting.................................................269
Liftgate...............................................................79
Liftgate Window...............................................111
Opening the Liftgate Window............................111
Lighting Control...............................................97
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam.................98
Headlamp High Beam.........................................98
Lighting..............................................................97
General Information.............................................97
Limited Slip Differential..............................224
Spare Tire.............................................................224
Trailer Towing......................................................224
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......12
Lincoln Protect..............................................544
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)...................545
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................544
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers...............290
Load Carrying................................................287
Load Limit.......................................................292
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................296
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................292
Locking and Unlocking..................................72
Activating Intelligent Access..............................73
Approach Detection Illumination......................76
Autolock..................................................................75
635
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Battery Saver..........................................................76
Illuminated Entry....................................................76
Illuminated Exit......................................................76
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade............................................................75
Power Door Locks................................................72
Remote Control.....................................................72
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................75
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................410
M
Maintenance..................................................359
General Information...........................................359
Media Hub......................................................440
Memory Function...........................................167
Driver Seat Memory............................................167
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................168
Passenger Seat Memory...................................168
Personal Profiles..................................................169
Saving a PreSet Position...................................167
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................120
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors................................105
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Moonroof..........................................................110
Bounce-Back..........................................................111
Opening and Closing the Moonroof................111
Motorcraft Parts.............................................419
MyKey — Troubleshooting............................70
MyKey™..............................................................67
Principle of Operation..........................................67
N
Navigation......................................................490
cityseeker.............................................................499
Destination Mode................................................491
Map Mode............................................................490
Navigation Map Updates.................................500
Navigation Menu................................................496
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.....................500
SYNC AppLink....................................................499
Waypoints.............................................................498
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............551
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor................................551
Normal Maintenance Intervals........................553
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................363
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................362
Opening and Closing the Hood...............359
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................339
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............339
Overhead Console.......................................189
P
Parking Aids...................................................236
Principle of Operation.......................................236
Passive Anti-Theft System............................83
SecuriLock™............................................................83
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................83
Pedals................................................................93
Perchlorate........................................................12
Personal Safety System™..............................50
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................50
Phone..............................................................482
During a Phone Call...........................................487
Making Calls........................................................486
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................483
Phone Menu........................................................483
Receiving Calls....................................................487
Smartphone Connectivity.................................489
Text Messaging...................................................488
636
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Post-Crash Alert System.............................330
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................72
Power Liftgate..................................................79
Obstacle Detection...............................................81
Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................79
Setting the Liftgate Open Height......................81
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................80
Using the Hands-Free Liftgate...........................81
Power Running Boards..................................87
Power Seats....................................................163
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.........................165
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion ..................................................165
Power Windows.............................................105
Accessory Delay..................................................106
Bounce-Back........................................................105
One-Touch Down................................................105
One-Touch Up......................................................105
Window Lock........................................................106
Pre-Collision Assist......................................280
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings.............................................................283
Blocked Sensors.................................................283
Distance Indication and Alert...........................281
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System...........281
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................410
R
Rear Axle........................................................224
Rear Parking Aid...........................................237
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................237
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............155
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents.......155
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air
Vents..................................................................155
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..............155
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed...........155
Setting the Rear Temperature..........................155
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off.........155
Switching the Rear Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................156
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................156
Rear Seats........................................................171
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat.....................................................................175
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost 40%
Seat for Easy Entry...........................................171
Folding the Second Row 40% Seat ................171
Folding the Second Row Center 20% Seat
.............................................................................174
Power Easy Entry.................................................173
Power Folding Rear Seats.................................175
Reclining the Second Row Outermost 40%
Seat Backrest...................................................174
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................287
Advanced System: Forward Divider, Cargo
Shelf and Rear Barrier (Bulkhead
Position)............................................................288
Cargo Management System............................287
Rear View Camera.......................................249
Camera Guidelines............................................250
Manual Zoom.......................................................251
Obstacle Distance Indicator.............................251
Rear Camera Delay.............................................251
Using the Rear View Camera System...........249
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................249
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............95
Rear Camera Washer...........................................96
Rear Window Washer..........................................96
Rear Window Wiper.............................................95
Recommended Towing Weights..............309
Reduced Engine Performance..................323
Refueling........................................................202
Refueling System Overview............................202
Refueling System Warning...............................204
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................203
637
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Remote Control...............................................62
Car Finder...............................................................64
Intelligent Access Key.........................................62
Memory Feature....................................................66
Remote Start..........................................................65
Replacing the Battery..........................................63
Sounding the Panic Alarm..................................64
Using the Key Blade............................................62
Remote Start...................................................157
Automatic Settings..............................................157
Heated and Cooled Features...........................157
Last Settings.........................................................157
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................385
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs.....................................................13
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................66
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................340
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......339
Roadside Assistance...................................326
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................327
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................326
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................326
Roadside Emergencies...............................326
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................290
Adjusting the Crossbar......................................291
Maximum Recommended Load
Amounts............................................................291
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................323
Running Out of Fuel.....................................201
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................201
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................201
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................57
Safety Precautions........................................199
Satellite Radio...............................................436
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)..................................................................438
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..................437
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.....................437
Troubleshooting..................................................438
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............558
Scheduled Maintenance.............................547
Seatbelt Extension.........................................48
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................45
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................46
Seatbelt Status.......................................................47
Seatbelts...........................................................39
Principle of Operation..........................................39
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................45
Conditions of operation......................................46
Seats.................................................................158
Security..............................................................83
Settings...........................................................504
911 Assist................................................................512
Ambient Lighting.................................................521
Bluetooth..............................................................507
Clock.....................................................................506
Display...................................................................523
General..................................................................518
Media Player........................................................505
Mobile Apps..........................................................517
Navigation.............................................................514
Phone....................................................................507
Radio.......................................................................513
SiriusXM.................................................................514
Sound....................................................................504
Valet Mode...........................................................524
Vehicle...................................................................521
Voice Control.......................................................523
Wi-Fi & Hotspot....................................................519
Side Airbags.....................................................56
638
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Side Sensing System..................................239
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................239
Sitting in the Correct Position....................158
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................404
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................410
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................555
Exceptions............................................................558
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................255
Stability Control............................................232
Principle of Operation.......................................232
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................192
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................193
Failure to Start......................................................193
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...................194
Important Ventilating Information...................194
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................194
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................194
Starting and Stopping the Engine..............191
General Information.............................................191
Steering...........................................................279
Electric Power Steering.....................................279
Steering Wheel................................................89
Storage Compartments...............................189
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................110
Sun Visors........................................................110
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................110
Supplementary Restraints System..............51
Principle of Operation..........................................51
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
SYNC™ 3...........................................................441
General Information............................................441
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting..........................524
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications................418
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)..........................335
Tire Care.........................................................390
Glossary of Tire Terminology...........................391
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................390
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................392
Temperature A B C..............................................391
Traction AA A B C................................................391
Treadwear.............................................................391
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............405
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.........................................407
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................407
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................388
Toll Reader......................................................109
Installing the Toll Reader...................................109
Towing a Trailer.............................................297
Load Placement..................................................297
Towing Points.................................................331
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........319
Four-wheel-down Towing................................320
Recreational Towing...........................................319
Towing.............................................................297
Traction Control.............................................231
Principle of Operation........................................231
Trailer Reversing Aids.................................298
Principle of Operation.......................................298
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™...............................298
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist............299
Troubleshooting..................................................303
639
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist.....................302
Trailer Sway Control....................................308
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................369
Transmission Code Designation...............421
Transmission...................................................210
Transporting the Vehicle.............................331
Type Approvals..............................................615
Radio Frequency Certification for Keys and
Remote Controls............................................627
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind Spot
Information System.......................................625
Radio Frequency Certifications for Body
Control Module...............................................627
Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise
Control Module...............................................627
Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid Range
Radar..................................................................619
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Anti-Theft System..........................................620
Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio
Transceiver Module.......................................623
Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC
3..........................................................................627
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)....................615
Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless
Charging..........................................................626
Radio Frequency Statement for Audio
Unit....................................................................628
U
Under Hood Overview................................360
Unique Driving Characteristics..................196
Universal Garage Door Opener.................181
HomeLink Wireless Control System................181
USB Port.........................................................439
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................256
Automatic Cancellation....................................260
Blocked Sensor..................................................262
Canceling the Set Speed.................................260
Changing the Set Speed..................................259
Detection Issues.................................................260
Following a Vehicle...........................................258
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop...................................................................258
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................260
Overriding the Set Speed................................259
Park Brake Application.....................................260
Resuming the Set Speed.................................260
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed...............257
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When Your
Vehicle is Stationary......................................257
Setting the Gap Distance.................................258
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off........260
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On.........257
Switching to Normal Cruise Control..............263
System Not Available........................................262
Using Cruise Control...................................255
Canceling the Set Speed.................................256
Changing the Set Speed..................................255
Resuming the Set Speed.................................256
Setting the Cruise Speed.................................255
Switching Cruise Control Off...........................256
Switching Cruise Control On...........................255
Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................216
4X4 Indicator Lights............................................216
4X4 Modes............................................................216
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles.............................................................219
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................218
Operating 4WD Vehicles With Spare or
Mismatched Tires...........................................218
Using Hill Descent Control........................235
Hill Descent Modes...........................................235
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................70
Using Power Running Boards......................87
Automatic Power Deploy....................................87
Automatic Power Stow........................................87
Bounce-back..........................................................88
Enabling and Disabling.......................................88
640
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Manual Power Deploy.........................................88
Using Snow Chains......................................404
Using Stability Control................................233
Stability Control and Traction Control with Roll
Stability Control™ (RSC™)...............................233
Using Traction Control.................................231
Switching the System On and Off...................231
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........231
Using Voice Recognition............................458
Audio Voice Commands...................................460
Climate Voice Commands.................................461
Mobile App Voice Commands........................466
Navigation Voice Commands..........................464
Phone Voice Commands...................................461
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands......................................................466
Voice Settings Commands...............................467
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................336
V
Vehicle Care..................................................378
General Information...........................................378
Vehicle Certification Label.........................420
Vehicle Identification Number..................420
Vehicle Storage............................................386
Battery...................................................................387
Body.......................................................................386
Brakes....................................................................387
Cooling system....................................................387
Engine...................................................................386
Fuel system..........................................................386
General.................................................................386
Miscellaneous......................................................387
Removing Vehicle From Storage....................387
Tires.......................................................................387
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................152
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............420
Voice Control...................................................90
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...................114
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator...................115
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lamp.........115
Auto Hold Active..................................................115
Auto Hold Unavailable........................................115
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator.............................................................115
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator....................................115
Battery.....................................................................115
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................115
Brake System Warning Lamp............................116
Cruise Control Indicator.....................................116
Direction Indicator................................................116
Door Ajar................................................................116
Electric Park Brake...............................................116
Electronic Limited Slip Differential...................116
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp...................................................................116
Engine Oil...............................................................117
Fasten Rear Seatbelt...........................................117
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.........................117
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..............................117
Front Airbag...........................................................117
Headlamp High Beam Indicator.......................117
Hill Descent............................................................117
Hood Ajar................................................................117
Liftgate Ajar............................................................117
Low Beam Malfunction Warning Lamp...........118
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp..........................117
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp....................118
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Lamp.........118
Parking Lamps.......................................................118
Powertrain Fault....................................................118
Service Engine Soon...........................................118
Stability Control and Traction Control
Indicator.............................................................118
Stability Control and Traction Control Off
Warning Lamp...................................................119
Tow Haul Indicator...............................................119
641
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
Washer Fluid Check......................................371
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................379
Waxing............................................................380
Welcome Lighting.........................................102
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................410
Wheels and Tires..........................................388
General Information...........................................388
Technical Specifications....................................416
Windows and Mirrors...................................105
Windshield Washers......................................95
Front Camera Washer.........................................95
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades....................373
Wipers and Washers......................................94
Wireless Accessory Charging....................186
642
Navigator (TB9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201808, First-Printing
Index
